JP7351733B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can play games.

For example, in Patent Document 1, when a preliminary determination unit acquires gaming data transmitted from the main control board, it determines whether or not the gaming data is data indicating a jackpot, and the timing at which the preliminary determination is performed Disclosed is a game machine in which a suggested game performance that is currently in progress suddenly stops and enters a frozen state.

JP 2014-188261 (Paragraphs 0111 to 0114)

Regarding a gaming machine that executes an effect based on the establishment of a starting condition, such as the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, there is room to improve the interest of the effect.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of the performance performed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that executes variable display of special identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition and subsequent establishment of the starting condition, and is capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means for determining that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means;
Decoration variable display means that can perform variable display of decoration identification information in response to execution of variable display of the special identification information, and display a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information over a specific period;
Equipped with
The decoration variable display means is capable of variably displaying the first decoration identification information and variable displaying the second decoration identification information as the variable display of the decoration identification information,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the special performance within a predetermined period from the establishment of the starting condition,
There are multiple types of special performances, and depending on the type of special performance, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the advantageous state differs.
When a specific type of special performance is executed, the visibility of the first decoration identification information decreases, but the visibility of the second decoration identification information does not decrease,
When a special performance of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the first decoration identification information is easily visible;
The performance execution means is
When the starting condition is satisfied outside the specific period, a specific type of special performance and a predetermined type of special performance can be executed in parallel;
The present invention is characterized in that when the starting condition is satisfied during the specific period, execution of a specific type of special performance is restricted, while a predetermined type of special performance can be executed.
According to such a configuration, by not reducing the visibility of the decoration identification information during a specific period, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, it is possible to secure an opportunity to perform a special effect.
(Measure 1) Other gaming machines are
The starting condition has been met (the game ball has entered the starting prize opening), and then the starting condition has been met (the game is not controlled by either the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, and the number of pending memories is A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of special identification information (fluctuating display of special symbols) based on the value of 0), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player. ),
Judgment means (running a starting winning determination process (step S101)) that determines that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening) CPU 103) and
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means;
In response to the execution of the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is displayed during a specific period (design stop period and pattern confirmation period). ) Decoration variable display means (performance control CPU 120) that can be displayed over
Equipped with
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special performance (blackout performance at winning time, flash performance at winning time) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition,
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect when winning a prize has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the flash effect when winning a prize),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see (as shown in Figures 9-15 (2) to (5), when a blackout effect is executed as a special effect, By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. visibility is reduced and becomes difficult to see),
When a special performance of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information is visible (as shown in Figure 9-17 (2) to (6), only the flash performance at the time of winning is performed as a special performance). is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are not displayed. The visibility of the [3rd layer] remains visible without deterioration),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined type of special performance while restricting execution of a specific type of special performance when the start condition is satisfied during the specific period (FIGS. 9-6 and 9). As shown in FIG. 7, in the start-up winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the start-up winning that occurred during a specific period, the execution of the winning blackout effect is restricted, while the (It is possible to execute a flash effect at the time of winning even if the display fluctuates in response to the starting winnings that occur during the period.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by not reducing the visibility of the decoration identification information during a specific period, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, it is possible to secure an opportunity to perform a special effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 078IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a time-saving loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 078IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 078IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition in the feature section 078IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the characteristic section 078IW. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display mode of the variable display of the 4th symbol, and the stop symbol. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode when transitioning to a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode when transitioning to a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode when transitioning to a time saving state. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timings of various effects in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol normal processing in modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 4. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in Modification 5. FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for winning (with time saving)/missing (without time saving), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit, ( C) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot. (A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing a layer structure, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the layer structure. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a blackout performance when winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|performance determination process at the time of a start winning prize of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|performance determination process at the time of a start winning prize of 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining a symbol stop period and a symbol confirmation period. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether to execute a blackout effect when winning a prize, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize and the presentation mode. FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to perform a chance effect and the effect mode. It is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a comment preview performance and the performance mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of active display. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change performance. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change performance. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of performances related to a winning blackout performance, a connection zone performance, a winning flash performance, a chance performance, a comment preview performance, and a change performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding a winning blackout presentation, a connection zone presentation, a winning flash presentation, a chance presentation, a comment preview presentation, and a change presentation. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of performances related to a winning flash performance, a chance performance, a comment preview performance, and a change performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding a winning flash presentation, a chance presentation, a comment preview presentation, and a change presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a start winning prize of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a start winning prize of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a performance mode related to a prize-winning performance, and (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a performance mode related to a blessing performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12) Next, the main operations of the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Description of Characteristic Portion 078IW) Next, the characteristic portion 078IW of this embodiment will be described. In this feature section 078IW, the gaming state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state (which is also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state. The probability of winning a ``Puzu'' in the ``Puzu'' game increases. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is 10%, but in the time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol is increased to 90%, and a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening). It becomes easier to do. In addition, not only in such an aspect, but for example, in the time saving state, by lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B compared to the normal state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) can be opened. It may be configured so that it is easier for game balls to win prizes.

Further, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the fluctuating display result is a jackpot and the jackpot game is controlled to a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, even when the fluctuating display result is a loss, the time-save winning symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to shorten the time based on what has been done.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 078IW. In addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 078IW is provided with a right-handed LED 078IW10 below the regular game reservation display 25C, as shown in FIG. 8-1. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED078IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, fourth symbol displays 078IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes a variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 078IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

(Jackpot probability, small hit probability, time-saving loss probability)
FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability, small win probability, and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 8-2 shows the jackpot probability, small win probability, and short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 8-3 shows the jackpot probability, small win probability, and short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, this example shows a configuration in which the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figure 8-2 (A) and Figure 8-3 (A), both when performing a variable display of the first special symbol and when executing a variable display of the second special symbol, a non-probable variable state (low probability In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/320), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "328/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/200) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-2(B) and 8-3(B), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "3280/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/20) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probability variable state compared to the non-probability variable state.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in Figure 8-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (and , regardless of whether it is a variable probability state or a non-probability variable state), the small hit probability is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 8-3, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (Regardless of whether the state is variable or not), the small hit probability is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 8-3, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is non-deterministic or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

Even if the configuration is such that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value as described above, while the small hit probability and time saving probability are constant, as shown in Figures 8-2 and 8-3, , the number of judgment values for each setting value may be configured to match by varying the probability of failure without time saving between setting values "1" to "6".

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are just examples, and various ways of setting the jackpot probability, small win probability, and short-time loss probability can be considered. For example, it may be configured such that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include a judgment value corresponding to a small win). For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 8-2), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may be configured so as not to include the judgment value. good.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the game shifts to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the game shifts to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a "small win", the opening of the big prize opening for an extremely short 0.5 seconds is performed twice during the small win game, and it looks like a "sudden and variable jackpot". The grand prize opening is opened in a similar manner.

As shown in Figure 8-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a jackpot, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figures 8-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is shortened, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 8-5 is just one example, and various ways of determining the time saving type can be considered. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 8-6, in this example, in the normal state, when "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 time reduction times, and when "work time reduction difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 50 time reduction times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 078IW. Of these, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for jackpots and small wins. Further, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the time-saving state time control controlled via the time-saving difference. Further, FIG. 8-8(E) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table E for failure in the variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

As shown in FIG. 8-7(A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot or small hit, the variation patterns include variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), One of the fluctuation patterns PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7(B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7(D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 8-7(C) and 8-7(D), in this example, in the time saving state, variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) are determined. The average fluctuation time is shorter than in normal conditions. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving loss. %, and the average fluctuation time is short.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-8(E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 8-8(E), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is even more than that in the short time state. is shorter.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time saving error during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again, it is the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time saving state controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 8-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 8-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

(Production control command)
8-9 and FIG. 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variable pattern command is a small win.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B300 (H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game. Command B301 (H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-9 and FIG. 8-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the tone number data is output to the audio control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Special design normal processing)
8-11 and FIG. 8-12 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 078IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 078IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 078IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 078IWS54).

In this characteristic part 078IW, by executing the processing of steps 078IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 078IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 078IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 078IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 078IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 078IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 8-2 and 8-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes a process that determines that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 8-2 (A) and Figure 8-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability change flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Fig. 8-2 (B) and Fig. 8-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 078IWS63), the process moves to step 078IWS64. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a jackpot (N in step 078IWS63), the process moves to step 078IWS66. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. There is also.

In step 078IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 078 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS74.

On the other hand, in step 078IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", select the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 8-2, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second" ", select the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-3. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for hit determination, and determines whether or not it is a small win (step 078 IWS67).

If it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 078IWS69). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS74.

If it is not determined to be a small hit (N in step 078IWS68), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 078IWS70). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 078IWS74. In this example, when the process of step 078IWS is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that there is no time saving without performing the determination process of whether or not the time saving occurs after step 078IWS71. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. It is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 078 IWS71). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 8-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 8-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 078IWS72), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 078 IWS73). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS74.

In addition, in step 078IWS73, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 078IWS65. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the small hit type is also determined, the determination process may be performed using a common type determination random number in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type, whether or not it is a small hit, and the time saving type (step 078 IWS74). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a small hit, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "1". However, if it is decided that the time saving difference is A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4". However, if it is decided to be a time saving loss C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6", and if it is decided to be a loss (no time saving), the special symbol stop symbol is "-". I decide. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 078IWS75).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 078IWS76).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag is set (step 078IWS1701). If the jackpot flag or the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpots and small wins shown in FIG. 8-7(A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 078IWS1702).

If neither the jackpot flag nor the small win flag is set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 078IWS1703). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a variation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 8-8(E) as a table for determining the variation pattern. Select E (step 078IWS1704). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table E on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table E on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the fluctuation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 078IWS1705). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 8-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 078IWS1706). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the fluctuation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 078IWS1707). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 8-7(D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1708 is selected (step 078IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the fluctuation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 078IWS1709).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 078IWS1702, S1704, S1706, S1708, and S1709 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. , FIG. 8-7 and FIG. 8-8 to determine which of the fluctuation patterns to use (step 078 IWS1710). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1711).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 078IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 078IWS1712), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 078IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 078IWS1714).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not it will be a jackpot, if it has not yet been transmitted, and then determines whether or not it will be a small win. Based on the result, the determination result of the jackpot type, and the determination result of the time saving type, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) to the production control CPU 120. (Step 078IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 078IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 078IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 078IWS1122). 078IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it has been decided to skip the time saving can be determined by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75, for example.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 078IWS1125, in this example, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 078IW10 starts lighting at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 078IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 078IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS1134.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 078IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS1134.

Unless it is determined that the time is shortened (N in step 078IWS1124), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer to “0” for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .5 seconds" (step 078IWS1132). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS1133). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS1134.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 078IWS1134).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 078IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 078IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it has been set (step 078 IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, and the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state. Reset (step 078IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078 IWS136).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS137). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 078 IWS138). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 078IWS139).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 078IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step 078IWS140). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 078IWS141). Further, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 078 IWS142). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B and ends the time saving state (step 078 IWS143).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS144). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS145). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS146).

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 078IWS140 to S146, a transition is made to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final variation, and the right hit notification is ended. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the time saving final variation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the variation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 078 IWS147). If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078 IWS148). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big prize opening (step 078IWS149). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S118) (step 078IWS150).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to make the short win a loss (step 078 IWS151). It should be noted that whether or not it has been decided to skip the time saving can be determined by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75, for example. If it is not determined that the time saving is to be canceled (in other words, if it is a case of a cancellation (no time saving)), the process moves to step 078IWS167.

If it is determined that the time saving is canceled, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 078IWS152). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 078 IWS153). (Step 078IWS154). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 078IWS155), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 078IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 078IWS157). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving is over A (Y in step 078 IWS158). Step 078IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 078IWS160), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 078IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 078IWS162). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS163.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 078 IWS163). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 078IWS164). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to start external output of the jackpot 2 signal to an external device such as a hall computer (step 078 IWS166).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 078IWS164 and S165, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving. Further, by executing the process of step 078IWS166, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started at the end of the symbol confirmation period.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 078IWS167).

(External output signal)
FIG. 8-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8-17, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started (see step 078 IWS166).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 078IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 078IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 078IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 078IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 078IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 078IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 078IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 078IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 078 IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 078IWS75. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 078IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability-variable jackpot or a sudden probability-variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability-variable flag and controls to a probability-variable state (step 078IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 078IWS542).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 078IWS543).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 078IW will be explained. FIG. 8-19 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this feature section 078IW. As shown in Figure 8-19, in the normal state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 078 IWS541), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (via jackpot) time saving state) (see steps 078IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if the result is a loss, if the time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state B (time-saving state via the time-saving loss) is controlled (see step 078 IWS164).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the variable probability state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is again changed to the variable probability state (see step 078 IWS541), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 078 IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 078 IWS70).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 078 IWS541), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state is returned. A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 078 IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 078 IWS164). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state is controlled (see steps 078 IWS140 to S143).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-19, in time-saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a probability variable state (see step 078 IWS541), and if a normal jackpot occurs, time-saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 078 IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in time saving state B, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 078 IWS164). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state is controlled (see steps 078 IWS140 to S143). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 078IWS158 and S159).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. It's okay.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the characteristic section 078IW. In FIG. 8-20, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 078IWS701). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 078IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, the display is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 078IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

(4th pattern)
FIG. 8-21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display of the fourth symbol and the display mode of the stop symbol executed in the fourth symbol process process of step 078IWS701. When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display 078IW21a, 21b. By repeating this, a variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol in a state of being lit in red. In addition, in the case of a small hit, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in green as a small win symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 8-21, a special symbol is provided as the time-saving loss symbol of the fourth symbol, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. The stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be a common symbol depending on the case.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 078IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 078IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 078IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 078IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS615). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 078IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 078IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 078IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 078IWS619), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 078IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 078IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 078IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS624).

If the received production control command is a small hit start designation command (step 078IWS625), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 078IWS626). If the received performance control command is a small hit end designation command (step 078IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 078IWS628).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 078IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 078 IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 078IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 078IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 078IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 078IWS636).

If the received production control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 078 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 078 IWS638).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 078IWS639), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS640). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is sent at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a short-time losing symbol is derived and displayed (see step 078 IWS1126). The lighting of the hit notification LED078IW20 is started.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 078IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 078IW20 (step 078IWS642).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 078IWS643 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 078IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 078IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 078IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 078IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 078IWS802 by the production control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 078IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 078IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 078IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "suddenly variable jackpot" or "small hit", the production control CPU 120 selects the combination of "135" decorative symbols (small hit/suddenly variable probability) as the stop symbol. The jackpot symbol) is determined.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 078IWS803). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 80. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 078IWS805). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 078IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 078IWS806).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 078IWS807).

(Variable display processing)
8-25 and FIG. 8-26 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 078IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 078IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 078IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 078IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 078IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 078IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 078IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 078IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the pattern fixed period on the production control means side (step 078IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 078IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 078IWS852). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 078IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 078IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 078IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 078IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 078IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 078IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 078IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 078IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 078IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 078IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 078IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 078IWS857), the process moves to step 078IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 078IWS857 and the process proceeds to steps 078IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 078IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
8-27 and FIG. 8-28 are flowcharts showing the special symbol per waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmed production period timer (step 078IWS871), and checks whether the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 078IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 078IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the presentation component) is executed in accordance with n) (step 078IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 078IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 078IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 078IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols, small winning symbols). (Step 078IWS879).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y in step 078IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS881). Then, the process ends.

When the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the process of step 078IWS879 (Y in step 078IWS882), the production control CPU 120 sets a small winning stop flag indicating that the small winning symbols have been confirmed and displayed (step 078IWS883). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 078IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 078IWS885). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 078 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 078IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 078IWS887). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 078IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speaker 27 as presentation component) is executed according to data 1) (step 078IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot performance process (step 078IWS890).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the small hit stop flag is set (step 078IWS891). If the small hit stop flag is set, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 078IWS892). In addition, whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small winning start designation command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If the small hit start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 078IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit performance (step 078IWS894). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 078IWS895), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the presentation device (image display device 5 as presentation component, various lamps as presentation component, and speaker 27 as presentation component) is executed (step 078IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit performance process (step 078IWS897).

If the small hit stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 waits for the start of variable display of the value of the production control process flag. It is updated to a value according to the process (step S170) (step 078IWS898).

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode when transitioning to the time saving state will be explained. FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes when transitioning to the time saving state. Of these, FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30 show specific examples of performance modes when transitioning to the time saving state via a jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-31 shows a specific example of the performance mode when transitioning to the time saving state via the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, a specific example of the performance mode when transitioning to the time saving state via the jackpot will be explained using FIGS. 8-29 and 8-30. As shown in FIG. 8-29(A), on the image display device 5, a normal jackpot symbol (in this example, a combination of "666" symbols) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot of the jackpot game starts. period (fanfare period). In this example, 20 seconds is secured as the fanfare period for the jackpot game, and during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. ). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), a character image 078IW30 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a character display 078IW31 such as "Move to sunset mode" is displayed as the character's dialogue. As a result, a mode transition effect is executed, and a transition to the time saving state A is notified.

In addition, in this example, when the jackpot game is started, the right-hand hit LED 078IW10 starts lighting up (see step 078IWS135), and the right-hand hit notification LED 078IW20 also starts lighting (see step 078IWS640). As shown in FIG. 29(B), at the same time, the display of the right-hand hitting icon image 078IW40 is also started on the image display device 5.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), right-handed hit notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS887). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the right-handed hitting notification is executed by displaying a character display 078IW32 such as "Right-handed hitting!" on the image display device 5.

Next, when the fanfare period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(D), a character display 078IW33 such as "Jackpot hit!" is displayed, and the game shifts to the round period of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is finished, the time saving state A is entered, and as shown in FIG. 8-30 (E), the image display device 5 is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot). (see step 078 IWS634). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-30(E), "sunset mode" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to a yellow display color.

Next, using FIG. 8-31, a specific example of the performance mode when transitioning to the time saving state via the time saving state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 8-31(A), on the image display device 5, a time saving losing symbol (in this example, a combination of losing symbols including a special symbol (star symbol)) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. shall be taken as a thing. In this example, 20 seconds is secured as the symbol confirmation period for the time-saving missed symbol, and during the symbol confirmation period, the mode transition effect is executed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-31(B). (See step 078IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(B), a character image 078IW34 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a character display 078IW35 such as "Move to forest mode" is displayed as the character's dialogue. As a result, a mode transition effect is executed, and a transition to the time saving state B is notified.

In addition, in this example, at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the short-time missed symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed hit LED 078IW10 starts to light up (see step 078IWS1125), and the right-handed hit notification LED 078IW20 also starts to light up (step 078 IWS640). However, as shown in FIG. 8-31(B), at the same time, the image display device 5 also starts displaying the right-hand hitting icon image 078IW41.

Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, as shown in FIG. 8-31(C), the right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS847). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(C), the right-handed hitting notification is executed by displaying a character display 078IW36 such as "Right-handed hitting!" on the image display device 5.

Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state B is entered, and as shown in FIG. (see step 078 IWS636). In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), "Forest Mode" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to a green display color.

Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31, the right-handed player icon images 078IW40, 41 are displayed at the same time as the right-handed player LED 078IW10 and the right-handed player notification LED 078IW20 start lighting, but the right-handed player icon The images 078IW40 and 41 start to be displayed in conjunction with the lighting of the right-handed player LED078IW10 and the right-handed player notification LED078IW20, and are erased in conjunction with the turning off of the right-handed player LED078IW10 and the right-handed player notification LED078IW20.

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of various effects in this feature section 078IW will be explained. FIGS. 8-32 and 8-33 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of various effects in this feature section 078IW. Of these, FIG. 8-32(A) shows the execution timing of various performances in the case of a jackpot (normal jackpot). Further, FIG. 8-32(B) shows the execution timing of various effects in the case of a deviation (no time saving) during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-33(A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-33(B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time saving is interrupted during the time saving state.

First, using FIG. 8-32(A), the execution timing of various performances in the case of a jackpot (normal jackpot) will be explained. As shown in Figure 8-32 (A), when a jackpot (normal jackpot) occurs, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols ends, and when the jackpot symbol (normal jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed, 0.5 The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed over a short symbol confirmation period of seconds (see step 078 IWS1132). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, 20 seconds is secured as a fanfare period for the jackpot game, and during the fanfare period, a mode transition effect is executed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-32(A). (see step 078IWS887). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 8-32(A), right-handed hitting notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS887). Next, after the fanfare period has elapsed, the round period and interval period of the jackpot game are repeated, and when all the rounds are finished and the ending period is finished (when the jackpot game is finished), the time saving state A is entered, and as shown in FIG. 8-32. As shown in (A), the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with a yellow display color) according to the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see step 078 IWS634) .

Note that the example shown in FIG. 8-32(A) shows the case of a normal jackpot, but when ending a jackpot game based on a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot, the image display device 5 displays a message according to the variable probability state. The background image (in this example, the background image with a red display color) is switched to the displayed background image (see step 078 IWS638).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-32(B), the execution timing of various effects in the case of a deviation (no time saving) during the normal state will be explained. As shown in Fig. 8-32 (B), when a loss occurs (no time savings) during the normal state, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols ends, and when the loss symbol (no time savings) is stopped and displayed, A missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed over a short symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 078 IWS1132). Further, when the symbol confirmation period ends, a background image (in this example, a background image with a blue display color) corresponding to the normal state is continuously displayed (see step 078 IWS632).

Note that the example shown in Figure 8-32 (B) shows a case where the deviation occurs during the normal state (no time saving), but for example, if the deviation occurs during the variable probability state (no time saving), the fluctuation Since the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (in this example, the background image with a red display color) is displayed before the start, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (in this example, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state) is displayed even after the symbol confirmation period ends. , a background image with a red display color) will continue to be displayed. For example, if the change occurs during time saving state A (no time saving), a background image corresponding to time saving state A (in this example, a background image with a yellow display color) is displayed before the change starts. Therefore, even after the symbol confirmation period ends, the background image (in this example, the background image with a yellow display color) corresponding to the time saving state A continues to be displayed. For example, if the change occurs during time saving state B (no time saving), a background image corresponding to time saving state B (in this example, a background image with a green display color) is displayed before the change starts. Therefore, even after the symbol confirmation period ends, the background image (in this example, the background image with a green display color) corresponding to the time saving state B continues to be displayed.

Next, using FIG. 8-33(A), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state will be explained. As shown in Figure 8-33 (A), when the time reduction occurs during the normal state, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols ends, and when the time reduction is stopped and the symbol is stopped, there is a 20 second symbol confirmation period. The time saving symbol is confirmed and displayed over the period of time (see step 078 IWS1128). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(A), a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(A), right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state B is entered, and as shown in FIG. (In this example, the background image has a green display color) (see step 078 IWS636).

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-33(B), the execution timing of various effects when the time saving is interrupted during the time saving state will be explained. As shown in Figure 8-33 (B), when the time shortening occurs during the time saving state, the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols ends, and when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, there is a 10 second symbol confirmation period. The time saving symbol is displayed as confirmed over the period of time (see step 078 IWS1130). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 8-33(B), a continuous effect is executed on the image display device 5 (see step 078IWS852). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state B is entered, and as shown in FIG. (In this example, the background image has a green display color) (see step 078 IWS636).

In addition, in this example, if the time reduction is A during the time saving state, the time saving state will continue until the next jackpot, but in this case, for example, "∞" etc. will be displayed in the continuous effect. , it may be configured to suggest that the time saving state will continue until the next jackpot.

(Modification 1)
In the above characteristic part 078IW, even if the time reduction is the same, the symbol confirmation period is different depending on whether it is in the normal state or in the time reduction state (20 seconds and 10 seconds). Not limited to such an aspect, the symbol determination period may be uniformly the same period. FIG. 8-34 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects in the first modification. Of these, FIG. 8-34(A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-34(B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time saving is interrupted during the time saving state.

In modification 1, as shown in FIG. 8-34(A), the execution timings of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state are the same as in FIG. 8-33(A). In modification 1, when the time shortening occurs during the time saving state, 20 seconds is secured as the symbol confirmation period, as shown in Figure 8-34 (B), as in the case where the time saving occurs during the normal state. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-34(B), the continuous performance is executed over a 20 second symbol determination period. In this way, by making the symbol determination period common between the normal state and the time saving state, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, although the first modification shows a case where the symbol confirmation period is made common to 20 seconds when there is a difference in time reduction between the normal state and the time reduction state, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol confirmation period in the case of a difference in time reduction between the normal state and the time reduction state has been made common to 0.5 seconds, and even if the time reduction occurs, the mode transition effect, right hit notification, and continuous effect will not be executed. may be configured.

(Modification 2)
In the above feature part 078IW, if the time shortening occurs during the time saving state, since the time saving state is already in progress, the symbol confirmation period is set at 10 seconds, which is shorter than during the normal state, and the continuous performance is executed. Although a case is shown in which notification is given that the time saving state continues, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. FIG. 8-35 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of various effects in the second modification. Of these, FIG. 8-35(A) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-35(B) shows the execution timing of various effects when the time saving is interrupted during the time saving state.

In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A), the execution timing of various effects when the time reduction occurs during the normal state is the same as that in FIG. 8-33(A). In modification example 2, if the time shortening occurs during the time shortening state, as shown in Figure 8-35 (B), a short period of 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period so that the continuous performance is not executed. It may be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, since the time-saving state continues before the start of the fluctuation that causes the time-saving difference, there is a low possibility that a situation will arise in which the player cannot recognize the gaming state even if the continuous effect is not executed. , no problem will occur.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 8-36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in modification 3. In modification 3, as shown in FIG. 8-36, the determination process of step 078IWS70 is not provided in the special symbol normal process, and the time reduction after step 078IWS71 is uniformly performed regardless of whether or not it is in a variable probability state. Determination processing is executed. However, in Modification 3, as shown in FIG. 8-36, when it is decided that the time saving is off (Y in step 078IWS72) and the time saving type is determined (step 078IWS73), the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag. It is confirmed whether or not there is one (step 078IWS73X). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 does not proceed to step 078IWS74, but forcibly determines a missed symbol (no time saving) as the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 078IWS74X ). Even if configured as shown in the processing flow of FIG. 8-36, it is possible to configure the time saving losing symbol not to be derived and displayed when the probability is changing.

In addition, in modification 3, other processes of the special symbol normal process are the same as the process shown in the above-mentioned characteristic part 078IW.

(Modification 4)
In the above characteristic part 078IW, a case is shown in which the right-hand hit LED078IW10 and the right-hand hit notification LED078IW20 start lighting at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time is shortened, but this is not limited to such a mode. The right-handed player LED078IW10 and the right-handed player notification LED078IW20 may be configured to start lighting at the end of the game. FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in modification 4.

In modification 4, the processes of steps 078IWS1125 and S1126 are not executed in the special symbol variation process. Instead, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 performs control to start external output of the jackpot 2 signal (step 078IWS166), and performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 078IW10 (step 078IWS166A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 078IWS166B).

By executing the process of step 078IWS166A, in modification 4, when the time shortening is over, lighting of the right-handed LED 078IW10 is started at the end of the symbol confirmation period. In addition, by executing the process of step 078IWS166B, in the modification 4, if the time is shortened, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the end of the symbol confirmation period. The lighting of the hit notification LED 078IW20 is started (see steps 078IWS639 and S640).

In addition, in the modification 4, other processes of the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process are the same as the process shown in the above-mentioned characteristic part 078IW.

(Modification 5)
FIG. 8-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in Modification 5. In this example, the variation pattern tables A, B, and E are the same as the variation pattern tables A, B, and E shown in the feature section 078IW above.

In the above feature part 078IW, even if the time is in the same time saving state, when the time saving state is controlled via a jackpot, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation) is compared to when the time saving state is controlled via a time saving loss. The case where the selection probability is as high as 80% and the average fluctuation time is short is shown. On the other hand, in Example 5, as shown in Figures 8-38(C) and 8-38(D), even if the time saving state is the same, the time saving state is controlled via the time saving difference. Compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is as high as 80%, and the average variation time is shorter.

As explained above, this characteristic part 078IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means A1-1), (means A1-2) to (means A11). .

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are things that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as "fluctuation") of identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game There are machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled).

Note that gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to hit a winning ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. This means that rights are generated, and that the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. A “jackpot” occurs when the Note that the derivation display means to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a jackpot occurs, for example, a jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game enters a jackpot game state in which it is easy to hit a winning ball. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are won in the big winning hole, the big winning hole is closed. The number of times the big prize opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the grand prize opening will be closed when the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize opening may be referred to as a round. Moreover, a game in a round is sometimes called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the final stop symbol (for example, the center symbol among the left center right symbols) is stopped and shaken continuously for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches a specific display result. The jackpot may occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols are changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. A performance performed in a state where sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach performance. In addition, the reach state and its appearance are called the reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a variable reach display. Then, if the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes a "miss" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying finding out how to generate a jackpot.

Among such gaming machines, some are configured to be able to display a second predetermined result that triggers control to a special state. For example, in JP-A No. 2002-210152 (paragraph 0029), the stop symbols are displayed in different display modes than the special display mode, such as "6, 6, 7", "4, 4, 5", "1, 2, 3", the variable time (5 to 10 seconds) of the special symbol display device is shortened to a shorter predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and such time reduction is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). It is stated that it is repeated continuously. Further, JP-A No. 2002-253794 (paragraphs 0046 and 0047) describes that when the reach is out of reach and the time saving mode is not set, the number of time saving times is determined based on the reach pattern.

If the gaming machines described in JP-A No. 2002-210152 and JP-A No. 2002-253794 are applied, the special state is controlled by the display of the second predetermined result without going through the control to the advantageous state. be able to. However, it is necessary to secure an execution period for the notification effect to notify the start of control to the special state. On the other hand, if the display period of the second predetermined result is increased even when displaying the second predetermined result in the special state in order to secure the execution period of the notification effect, the variable display efficiency will decrease. There's a problem. Therefore, the purpose of the configuration of the gaming machine shown below is to provide a gaming machine that can secure the execution period of the notification effect in a non-special state and can improve the interest in the game.

(Means A1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing games, which displays a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first starting winning hole or a second starting winning hole). A variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of displaying a display result of a variable display, and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as a display result of a variable display. ) is displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117) that can control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) ), and after being controlled to an advantageous state, a special state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than a non-special state (e.g., a normal state). The variable display execution means includes a state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 078IWS164, S537 to S539), and the variable display execution means displays a predetermined result different from the specific result (for example, as a display result of the variable display). , a losing symbol) can be displayed, and the predetermined results include a first predetermined result (for example, a losing symbol (no time saving)) that does not trigger special state control, and a second predetermined result that triggers special state control. (for example, a time-saving missed symbol), and in the non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds). (for example, see FIG. 8-32(B) and FIG. 8-33(A)), and notifies that control of the special state will be started during the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state. (for example, a mode transition effect) (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120), and the display period (for example, 10 seconds) of the second predetermined result in the special state is , is characterized by being shorter than the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (for example, see FIGS. 8-33(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the execution period of the notification effect in the non-special state, improve the interest in the game, and also make it possible to maintain the display period of the first predetermined result and the display period of the second predetermined result in the special state. It is possible to shorten the time period and increase the variable display efficiency.

(Means A1-2) A gaming machine capable of playing games, which displays a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first starting winning hole or a second starting winning hole). A variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of displaying a display result of a variable display, and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as a display result of a variable display. ) is displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117) that can control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) ), and after being controlled to an advantageous state, a special state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than a non-special state (e.g., a normal state). The variable display execution means includes a state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 078IWS164, S537 to S539), and the variable display execution means displays a predetermined result different from the specific result (for example, as a display result of the variable display). , a losing symbol) can be displayed, and the predetermined results include a first predetermined result (for example, a losing symbol (no time saving)) that does not trigger special state control, and a second predetermined result that triggers special state control. (for example, a time-saving missed symbol), and in the non-special state, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds) is the display period of the first predetermined result (for example, 0.5 seconds). (for example, see FIG. 8-32(B) and FIG. 8-33(A)), and notifies that control of the special state will be started during the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state. (for example, a mode transition effect) (for example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120), and display period information (for example, symbol confirmation designation command) (for example, a part that executes steps 078IWS1129, S1131, and S1133 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the information output means is configured to output a first predetermined result display period. The first display period information (for example, the first symbol fixed C designation command, the second symbol fixed C designation command) that can specify the 1 symbol confirmation A specification command, 2nd symbol confirmation A specification command, 1st symbol confirmation B specification command, 2nd symbol confirmation B specification command) are output as different display period information, and the second predetermined result in the special state is output. The display period is the same period as the display period of the second predetermined result in the non-special state (for example, in modification 1, as shown in FIG. 8-34, the symbol confirmation period is the same in the normal state and the time saving state is common for 20 seconds), the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect based on the second display period information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 078IWS847 when determining Y in step 078IWS846). ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure an execution period for the notification effect in a non-special state, improve interest in the game, and execute the notification effect at an appropriate timing. Further, since the display period of the second predetermined result is a common period regardless of the gaming state, an increase in the capacity of the control means can be suppressed by common processing.

(Means A2) In the means A1-1 and A1-2, an advantageous entry state (e.g., open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can enter and a disadvantageous entry state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter (e.g., The advantageous state control means controls the variable means to enter the advantageous state in the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (in steps S114 to S117, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in an open state), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, a losing symbol) that does not involve control of the variable means to enter an advantageous state. may have been done. According to such a configuration, even when the variable means does not control the advantageous entry state, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the control of the special state, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state shifts to the time saving state when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to provide a small winning symbol with time saving, and when the small winning symbol with time saving is derived and displayed, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state at the end of the small winning game.

(Means A3) In the means A1-1, the means A1-2, or the means A2, a determining means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not to display the second predetermined result as the display result of the variable display. 078IWS71) and a high probability state control means (for example, execution of step 078IWS541 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) with a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state. The determining means does not determine whether or not to display the second predetermined result in a high probability state (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step 078IWS70, 078IWS71). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged when the game is controlled to a high probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A4) In means A1-1, means A1-2, or means A2, determining means for determining whether or not to display the second predetermined result as the display result of the variable display (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) 078IWS71) and a high probability state control means (for example, execution of step 078IWS541 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) with a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state. ), and the variable display execution means displays the first predetermined result as the display result of the variable display when it is determined to display the second predetermined result in the high probability state (for example, the variable display execution means displays the first predetermined result as the display result of the variable display). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 078IWS74X when step 078IWS73X is Y. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged when the game is controlled to a high probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means A5) In any of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A4, the display period of the second predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds, 10 seconds) is the display period of the specific result (for example, 0 seconds). .5 seconds) (for example, see FIGS. 8-32(A), 8-33(A), and (B)), and during the period in which advantageous state control is started, The player is configured to include a promotion notification execution means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS887 in the production control CPU 120) that can execute a promotion notification (for example, a right-hand hit notification) that prompts a firing operation of the game medium to the right area). may have been done. According to such a configuration, when a specific result is displayed, the advantageous state can be quickly controlled, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1-1, A1-2 to A5, the special state control means controls to a special state (for example, when the display period of the second predetermined result ends). The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, a promotion notification (for example, the right A promotion notification execution means (e.g., a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes step 078IWS847) capable of executing a game play notification), and an operation for firing game media into a predetermined area, triggered by the start of the second predetermined result display period. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100) that causes a light emitter (for example, right-handed LED078IW10) to emit light that prompts the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that he or she should perform an operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area.

(Means A7) In any one of the means A1-1, A1-2 to A5, the special state control means controls the special state (for example, when the display period of the second predetermined result ends). The control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and during the display period of the second predetermined result, a promotion notification (for example, the right A promotion notification execution means (e.g., a portion of the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 078IWS847) capable of executing a game play notification), and an operation for firing game media into a predetermined area, triggered by the end of the second predetermined result display period. A light emitting body control means (for example, in Modification 4, the part that executes step 078IWS166A in the game control microcomputer 100) that causes a light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED078IW10) to emit light that prompts the game to be played. Good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that he or she should perform an operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area.

(Means A8) In any one of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A7, the variable display execution means executes variable display of identification information (for example, a first special symbol, a second special symbol). , a special variable display execution means (for example, production control) that executes a variable display of special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) in response to the variable display of the identification information, and displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information. The special variable display execution means is configured to display the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, when two LEDs are lit in blue) in a manner different from the second predetermined result. (for example, see FIG. 8-21(B)). According to such a configuration, the progress of the game can be recognized.

(Means A9) In any one of the means A1-1, the means A1-2 to the means A8, a special signal that can specify that the display period of the second predetermined result is being controlled is triggered by the end of the display period of the second predetermined result. (For example, jackpot 2 signal) It may be configured to include a signal output means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally recognize that the special state is being controlled.

(Means A10) In any of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A9, the special state control means controls whether the second predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state and the second predetermined result in the special state. It may be configured such that the special state is controlled until the variable display is performed a different number of times depending on when is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 8-6). According to such a configuration, even when the same second predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage varies depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve interest in the game.

(Means A11) In any of means A1-1, means A1-2 to means A10, the variable display execution means displays an unfavorable second predetermined result (for example, time saving loss C) and an advantageous second predetermined result as the second predetermined result. 2 predetermined result (for example, time saving error A), and the special state control means is capable of displaying a variable number of times when the favorable second predetermined result is displayed than when the unfavorable second predetermined result is displayed. The display may be configured to be controlled in a special state until display is executed (for example, see FIGS. 8-6). According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the type of the second predetermined result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 078IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means B1) to (means B13) are disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine capable of playing games, which executes a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, winning of a game ball in a first starting winning hole and a second starting winning hole). , a variable display execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S112 and S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of displaying the display result of the variable display, and a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) as the display result of the variable display. An advantageous state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117) that can control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) based on what is displayed; , special state control that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and in which the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than a non-special state (e.g., normal state) after being controlled to an advantageous state. means (for example, the part that executes steps 078IWS164, S537 to S539 in the game control microcomputer 100), and background image display means (for example, steps 078IWS632, S634, S636, S638 in the performance control CPU 120) that displays the performance background image. ), and the special state control means is capable of controlling the special state based on a predetermined result different from the specific result (for example, a time-saving missed symbol) being displayed as a display result of the variable display. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 078IWS164), and the variable display execution means displays a shortened variable display (for example, super shortened fluctuation, shortened fluctuation) whose variable display period is shorter than the normal variable display. It is possible to perform a shortened variable display at different rates depending on whether the special state is controlled based on the display of a predetermined result or the case where the special state is controlled after an advantageous state. For example, see FIGS. 8-7(C) and (D)), the background image display means is controlled to a special state based on a predetermined result being displayed, and when it is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state. The feature is that a different performance background image is displayed depending on the case where the player is present (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 078IWS634 and S636). According to such a configuration, since the variable display tendency and the performance background image differ depending on the event that triggered the special state control, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B2) In means B1, when the variable display execution means is controlled to a special state based on displaying a predetermined result, the reduction is reduced at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after an advantageous state. It may be configured such that variable display can be performed (for example, see FIGS. 8-38(C) and (D) in Modification 5). According to such a configuration, when a special state is controlled based on the display of a predetermined result, no gaming value is given as in the case where it is controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing variable display efficiency while suppressing the gambling nature.

(Means B3) In means B1, when the variable display execution means is controlled to the special state based on the display of a predetermined result, the reduction is reduced at a lower rate than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state. It may be configured such that variable display can be performed (for example, see FIGS. 8-7(C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variable display efficiency when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state, and to improve the interest in the game.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, an entry advantageous state (e.g. open state) in which the game medium (e.g. game ball) can enter and an entry disadvantageous state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter (e.g. , closed state) and variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7), and the advantageous state control means controls the variable means to enter the advantageous state in the advantageous state (for example, the microcomputer for game control 100, in steps S114 to S117, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state), and the predetermined result is a display result (for example, a losing symbol) that does not involve control of the entry advantageous state of the variable means. may be configured. According to such a configuration, even when the variable means does not control the advantageous entry state, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the control of the special state, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, a determining means (for example, executing step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) determines whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of the variable display. (part), and high probability state control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) with a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state. , and the determining means does not determine whether or not to display a predetermined result in a high probability state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute step 078IWS71 when Y in step 078IWS70). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged when the game is controlled to a high probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to B4, a determining means (for example, executing step 078IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) determines whether or not to display a predetermined result as a display result of the variable display. (part), and high probability state control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS541 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to a high probability state (for example, variable probability state) with a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state. , the variable display execution means displays a specific predetermined result that does not trigger special state control as a display result of the variable display when it is determined to display a predetermined result in a high probability state (for example, a modified example). In No. 3, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 078IWS74X when step 078IWS73X is Y. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged when the game is controlled to a high probability state that is more advantageous than the special state.

(Means B7) In any of the means B1 to B6, the display period of the predetermined result (for example, 20 seconds, 10 seconds) is longer (for example, , see FIGS. 8-32(A), 8-33(A), and (B)), during the period when control of the advantageous state is started, the game media is transferred to a predetermined area (for example, the right area of the gaming area). It may be configured to include a promotion notification execution means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS887 in the production control CPU 120) that can execute promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) that prompts a firing operation. According to such a configuration, when a specific result is displayed, the advantageous state can be quickly controlled, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means B8) In any one of the means B1 to B7, the special state control means controls the special state using the end of the display period of the predetermined result as a trigger (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 078IWS164 ), and a promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, a right-hand hit notification) that prompts an operation of ejecting the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the right area of the game area) during a display period of a predetermined result. (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the production control CPU 120) and a light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED 078IW10) that prompts the operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area, triggered by the start of the display period of the predetermined result. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS1125 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that he or she should perform an operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area.

(Means B9) In any of the means B1 to B7, the special state control means controls to a special state upon the end of the display period of a predetermined result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls step 078IWS164). ), and a promotion notification execution means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, a right-hand hit notification) that prompts an operation of ejecting the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the right area of the game area) during a display period of a predetermined result. (For example, the part that executes step 078IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120) and a light emitting body (for example, right-handed LED 078IW10) that prompts the operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area, triggered by the end of the display period of a predetermined result. It may be configured to include a light emitting body control means (for example, in Modification 4, the part that executes step 078IWS166A in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that he or she should perform an operation of ejecting game media into a predetermined area.

(Means B10) In any of the means B1 to B9, the variable display execution means executes variable display of identification information (for example, a first special symbol, a second special symbol), and changes the display of identification information to a variable display. Correspondingly, the special variable display execution means (for example, execute step 078IWS701 in the performance control CPU 120) can execute variable display of the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) and display the display result of the variable display of the special identification information. The special variable display execution means displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the display is stopped with two LEDs lit in blue) in a manner different from the predetermined result. (For example, see FIG. 8-21(B)). According to such a configuration, the progress of the game can be recognized.

(Means B11) Any one of the means B1 to B10 outputs a special signal (e.g., jackpot 2 signal) that can specify that it is being controlled in a special state, triggered by the end of the display period of a predetermined result. It may be configured to include a possible signal output means (for example, a part that executes step 078IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally recognize that the special state is being controlled.

(Means B12) In any of the means B1 to B11, the special state control means controls the number of times different when the predetermined result is displayed in the non-special state and when the predetermined result is displayed in the special state. The display may be configured to be controlled in a special state until variable display is executed (for example, see FIGS. 8-6). According to such a configuration, even if the same predetermined result is displayed, the degree of advantage varies depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to increase interest in the game.

(Means B13) In any of the means B1 to B12, the variable display execution means displays an unfavorable predetermined result (e.g., time saving loss C) and an advantageous predetermined result (e.g., time saving loss A) as the predetermined results. possible, and the special state control means controls the special state until the variable display is executed a greater number of times when an advantageous predetermined result is displayed than when an unfavorable predetermined result is displayed (for example, in the case shown in FIG. 8-6 (see). According to such a configuration, since the degree of advantage varies depending on the type of predetermined result, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 25TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 25TM will be explained using FIGS. 9-1 to 9-19. In this embodiment, at the timing when a starting winning occurs, it is possible to execute a special effect (a blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at winning, which will be described later) that informs that the expectation level of jackpot is high in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. , and at a timing different from the timing when the starting prize has occurred (timing different from the execution timing of the special effect), a predetermined effect (a chance to be described later) that notifies that the expectation level of the jackpot of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is high. It is possible to perform eye effects, comment preview effects, and change effects).

(Light emitter 25TM100)
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to [Description regarding the characteristic part 25TM] of the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the [Description regarding the characteristic part 25TM] of the present embodiment is provided with a light emitting body 25TM100 near the image display device 5 (upper right corner), for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1. The light emitting body 25TM100 is made to emit light (in this example, it lights up and/or blinks). In this embodiment, at the timing when a starting winning occurs, a winning flash effect is performed to notify that the jackpot expectation level of the fluctuating display corresponding to the starting winning is high. As presentation modes of the flash effect when winning a prize, there are a presentation mode in which the light-emitting body 25TM100 emits white light, and a presentation mode in which the light-emitting body 25TM100 emits red light. When the light emitter 25TM100 emits red light, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the light emitter 25TM100 emits white light (see FIG. 9-7(B)).

Note that the other configurations of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 related to [Description regarding the characteristic portion 25TM] are the same as the configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, so the description will be omitted. .

(Random value)
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3, a random number MR4 for determining a general figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-2, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Fluctuation pattern judgment)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment table is used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be "miss (with time saving)" or "miss (with time saving)". / For loss (no time saving)] Fluctuation pattern determination table, Fluctuation pattern determination table [For small hit] used when it is predetermined that the fluctuating display result will be a "small hit", and Fluctuation pattern determination table for fluctuating display result. A variation pattern determination table [for jackpot] used when it is predetermined to make a "jackpot" is prepared in advance.

[For missed (with time saving) / missed (without time saved)] In the variation pattern judgment table, the variation pattern of "Non-reach missed", "Normal reach missed" variation pattern, "Super reach A missed" variation pattern, "Super reach A missed" variation pattern, A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for each of the fluctuation patterns of "reach B is off" and "super reach C is off". There is.

The "non-reach-out" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which, after the start of the variation display, a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the result of the variation display becomes "out-of-reach" is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined that the variation pattern is "non-reach" in which a reach effect is not executed is 12 seconds. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "Non-Reach Off", the fluctuation display period is the fluctuation pattern ("Normal Reach Off", "Normal Reach Off", This is shorter than the variable display period (20 to 70 seconds) for "Super reach A is off," "Super reach B is off," and "Super reach C is off."

[For small hit] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value for the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation small win" within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. There is.

In this embodiment, in a variation pattern that involves a special variation ("special variation small hit", "special variation jackpot"), after the variation display starts, a special effect image is displayed without using a decorative pattern. As a result, a special variation performance is executed to notify whether the player has won either a small hit or a jackpot, and the final display result is notified after the special variation performance ends. It is assumed that the variation pattern of the "special variation small win" and the variation pattern of the "special variation jackpot" have a common performance mode until the final display result is announced.

In this embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a special variation ("special variation small hit", "special variation jackpot") is 15 seconds. If a fluctuation pattern is determined to be accompanied by a special fluctuation (“special fluctuation small hit”, “special fluctuation jackpot”), the fluctuation display period will be a “non-reach out” fluctuation that does not involve a reach effect (reach state does not occur). It is longer than the variation display period (12 seconds) when it is determined to be a pattern, and the variation patterns that involve a reach effect (reach state is established) ("Normal reach missed", "Super reach A missed", "Super reach Shorter than the fluctuation display period (20 to 70 seconds) of "B Miss", "Super Reach C Miss", "Normal Reach Jackpot", "Super Reach A Jackpot", "Super Reach B Jackpot", "Super Reach C Jackpot") It has become.

[For jackpot] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, there are fluctuation patterns of "special fluctuation jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "normal reach jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "super reach A jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "super reach B jackpot", fluctuation patterns of "super reach jackpot", A predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the "Reach C Jackpot" variation pattern.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern that involves normal reach ("Normal reach missed" and "Normal reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the super reach effect (battle effect) described later is not executed, and the final display result is Definitely stopped.

In this embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a normal reach ("normal reach missed" or "normal reach jackpot") is 20 seconds. If a fluctuation pattern is determined to be accompanied by a normal reach ("Normal reach miss" and "Normal reach jackpot"), the fluctuation display period will be determined to be a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a special fluctuation ("Special fluctuation small hit", "Special fluctuation jackpot"). The fluctuation display period in the case of a reach effect is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 to 15 seconds) when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach" without a reach effect (the reach state is not established), and Variations in fluctuation patterns associated with reach (“Super Reach A Miss”, “Super Reach A Jackpot”, “Super Reach B Miss”, “Super Reach B Jackpot”, “Super Reach C Miss”, “Super Reach C Jackpot”) It is shorter than the display period (50 to 70 seconds).

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns accompanying super reach ("super reach A missed", "super reach A jackpot", "super reach B missed", "super reach B jackpot", "super reach C missed", "super reach In "C Jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle performance is executed as a super reach performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle to notify whether or not they have won the jackpot. After finishing, the final display result is fixed and stopped.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern involving Super Reach A ("Super Reach A Miss" and "Super Reach A Jackpot"), a teammate character and an enemy character A battle each other to win a jackpot as a super reach effect. A battle A performance is executed to notify whether or not the player is playing the game. In addition, in the variation patterns involving Super Reach B (“Super Reach B Miss” and “Super Reach B Jackpot”), as a Super Reach effect, whether an ally character and an enemy B character have a battle and win the jackpot. A battle B effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is played. In addition, in the variation patterns involving Super Reach C (“Super Reach C Miss” and “Super Reach C Jackpot”), as a Super Reach effect, whether an ally character and an enemy C character have a battle and win the jackpot. A battle C effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is played.

In this embodiment, the variation display period when it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach A ("super reach A miss" and "super reach A jackpot") is 50 seconds, and the variation pattern with super reach B ("Super Reach B Missed" and "Super Reach B Jackpot"), the fluctuation display period is 60 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern with Super Reach C ("Super Reach C Missed" and "Super Reach C Jackpot") is determined to be 60 seconds. The fluctuating display period when it is determined that it is a jackpot ("jackpot") is 70 seconds.

Fluctuation patterns with super reach (“Super Reach A Miss”, “Super Reach A Jackpot”, “Super Reach B Miss”, “Super Reach B Jackpot”, “Super Reach C Miss”, “Super Reach C Jackpot”) If determined, the fluctuation display period will be determined as a fluctuation pattern that does not involve super reach ("non-reach out", "normal reach out", "normal reach jackpot", "special fluctuation small hit", "special fluctuation jackpot"). This is longer than the fluctuation display period (12 to 20 seconds) of any of the fluctuation patterns in the above cases.

As shown in Figure 9-3 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [missing (with time saving)/missing (without time saving)], when the set value is "1", the range of the judgment value of MR3 is Among 1 to 997, 1 to 897 are assigned to the "non-reach out" variation pattern, 898 to 977 are assigned to the "normal reach out" variation pattern, and 978 to 987 are "super 988 to 994 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Reach A is off", 988 to 994 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super reach B is off", and 995 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super reach C is off". ing.

Also, in any case where the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 897 is assigned to the variation pattern of "Non-reach", 898 to 977 is assigned to the variation pattern of "Normal reach", and 978 to 987 is assigned to "Non-reach" variation pattern. 988 to 994 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super reach A is off", 995 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super reach B is off", and 995 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super reach C is off". It is being In this way, when the display result is "miss (with time saving)" or "miss (with time saving)", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is the same regardless of the setting value.

As shown in Figure 9-3 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table [for small hits], when the set value is "1", 1 to 997 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 up to are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "special fluctuation small hit".

Also, in any case where the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "special variation small win". In this way, when the display result is a "small win", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in Figure 9-3 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for jackpot], if the setting value is "1", the range of judgment values of MR3 is 1 to 50 from 1 to 997. is assigned to the "Special Variation Jackpot" variation pattern, 51 to 100 is assigned to the "Normal Reach Jackpot" variation pattern, and 101 to 297 is assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" variation pattern. 298 to 597 are assigned to the "Super Reach B Jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 598 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

Also, in any case where the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", the judgment value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "Special Variation Jackpot" variation pattern, 51 to 100 are assigned to the "Normal Reach Jackpot" variation pattern, and 101 to 297 are assigned to the "Special Variation Jackpot" variation pattern. 298 to 597 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach A Jackpot", 598 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach B Jackpot", and 598 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach C Jackpot". It is being In this way, when the display result is a "jackpot", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is the same regardless of the set value.

(layer structure)
9-4(A) is a conceptual diagram schematically showing the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5, and FIG. 9-4(B) is a conceptual diagram showing the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5. It is an explanatory diagram. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) and (B), the layer structure is composed of four types of layers: a first layer, a second layer, a third layer, and a fourth layer. There is.

As shown in Figure 9-4(A), the first layer is displayed on the frontmost layer, the second layer is displayed on the layer one layer behind the first layer, and the third layer is displayed on the top layer of the second layer. The fourth layer is displayed one layer behind the third layer, that is, the backmost layer. Therefore, as for the display priority of the layers, the first layer has the highest display priority, the second layer has the lowest display priority, then the third layer has the lowest display priority, and the fourth layer has the lowest display priority. It has become. That is, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer. Note that information displayed in the predetermined display area of a layer with a high display priority has higher visibility than information displayed in the predetermined display area of a layer with a lower display priority (displayed closer to the player's perspective). ).

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-4 (B), the first layer displays small symbols and the value of the number of pending memories (the value of the number of first pending memories, the value of the second number of pending memories), which will be described later. Ru. The second layer displays blackout images (first blackout image 25TM300B1, second blackout image 25TM300B2) when executing a winning blackout effect, which will be described later, and a flame effect image 25TM300F when executing a connection zone effect, which will be described later. be done. The third layer displays a pending display in the pending display area 25TM011, an active display in the active display area 25TM013, decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a comment image at the time of execution of a comment preview effect to be described later. Background images (normal background image 25TM200A, special background image 25TM200B), which will be described later, are displayed on the fourth layer.

In the following description, when a predetermined image is arranged in the n-th layer, the predetermined image may be referred to as "predetermined image [n-th layer]". For example, when a decorative pattern as a predetermined image is arranged on the third layer, the decorative pattern is referred to as a "decorative pattern [third layer]."

Note that a layer structure with different display priorities may be provided for the specific layer. For example, as described above, decorative patterns, corresponding displays (pending display, active display), mini-characters, and comment images can be arranged in the third layer. Here, the third layer is composed of a 3-1 layer, a 3-2 layer, and a 3-3 layer, in which decorative patterns are arranged on the 3-1 layer, and Corresponding displays (pending display, active display) may be arranged in the 2nd layer, and mini characters and comment images may be arranged in the 3rd-3rd layer. In this case, the display priority is set in the order of 3-3rd layer<3-2nd layer<3-1st layer.

(Blackout effect when winning)
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a blackout performance at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning blackout effect is a preview effect that is immediately executed based on the fact that it has been decided to execute the winning blackout effect at the start of winning. When the winning blackout effect is executed, the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, and then the display screen of the image display device 5 is A second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire area.

In this embodiment, a determination process for starting winning is performed based on the occurrence of a starting winning, and a command for starting winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Since the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout effect based on the command at the time of starting winning, the execution timing of the winning blackout effect is immediately after the occurrence of the starting winning (starting condition is met). This is the timing within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds (100 ms)) after a starting winning occurs (starting conditions are met). For the player, the winning blackout effect is felt to be executed at the timing when the starting winning occurs (timing when the starting conditions are met), so the timing at which the winning blackout effect is executed is at the timing when the starting winning occurs. It can also be said that this is the timing at which this occurs (the timing at which the starting conditions are met).

Specifically, in the winning blackout effect, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a blackout image (a first black By displaying the out image 25TM300B1, the second blackout image 25TM300B2), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display where the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met) becomes a jackpot. suggests. In this case, the winning blackout effect is executed as a pre-read preview effect.

In this embodiment, when the winning blackout effect is started based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the winning blackout effect is a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the target of the winning blackout effect). It is assumed that the display is executed continuously until the timing when a certain variable display is started.

In this embodiment, the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is a blackout image that is displayed at the timing when the winning blackout effect is started, and is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. This is a cover image in a manner reminiscent of the sudden disappearance of a production image (decorative design [third layer], corresponding display (suspended display, active display) [third layer], background image [fourth layer], etc.) .

In addition, the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is a blackout image that is displayed at a timing after the first blackout image is displayed, and is the effect image that was displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 ( This is a cover image in a manner that reminds us that the decorative pattern [third layer], background image [fourth layer], etc.) continues to disappear. That is, the first blackout image is an image that notifies that the winning blackout effect has started, and the second blackout image is an image that notifies that the winning blackout effect is continuing to be executed. This is the image to be notified.

In this embodiment, by displaying a blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1, second blackout image 25TM300B2) [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the background image The visibility of the [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [3rd layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see. That is, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [4th layer] continues to be difficult to see, the decorative pattern [3rd layer] is also difficult to see, and the corresponding display (pending display, The difficult-to-see state of the third layer (active display) will also continue.

Here, due to the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], and corresponding displays (pending display, active display) [3rd layer] will continue to be difficult to see. , the value of the number of pending memories [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer], which will be described later, remain in a visible state. In other words, the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer] that was displayed as a background image, the decorative pattern [3rd layer] that was variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decoration pattern [3rd layer] that was displayed in the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] and the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] displayed in the active display area 25TM013 decreases, the first pending storage number display Variations in "2" [first layer] displayed in area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] displayed in second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. The visibility of the displayed small patterns [first layer] has not decreased (see Figure 9-5).

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on receiving the variable pattern designation command. Further, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 based on receiving the variation pattern designation command. In other words, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (in parallel) in response to the variable display in the special symbol, and the small symbols are displayed in parallel (in parallel) in response to the variable display in the special symbol. Display is running.

In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 displays the value of the first pending memory number in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the value of the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5. The value of the second pending storage number is displayed on 25TM025.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the start of the winning blackout effect (that is, at the timing when the first blackout image is displayed), the speakers 8L and 8R are used to make a sound ( A blackout sound effect effect is executed in which a sound effect (sound effect) is reproduced and outputted, and thereafter a mute effect in which no sound is reproduced and outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9, which is a presentation device different from the light emitting body 25TM100, is turned off during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed.

(Connection zone production)
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the connection zone performance after the winning blackout performance ends, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The connection zone performance is composed of a first performance and a second performance executed after the first performance.

The first performance in the connection zone performance is the timing at which the winning blackout performance ends (i.e., the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the variable display that is the target of the winning blackout performance) starts). , erases the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] from the image display device 5, and creates a flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the words "Battle ZONE" as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. This is a preview effect that displays "Layer".

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 displays a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the words "Battle ZONE" as a background image when the first performance in the connection zone performance is executed. Control is being executed to arrange the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] in the fourth layer, and at this time, the words "Battle ZONE" are placed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Since the control for placing the included flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] in the second layer is also executed and displayed, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is difficult to see.

Furthermore, the second performance in the connection zone performance means that the flame effect image 25TM300F is erased from the image display device 5 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the first performance, and the flame effect image 25TM300F is deleted at a predetermined timing (main In the example, the special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] depicting a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the words "Battle ZONE" is used as the background image of the decorative pattern until the time when it develops into a super reach (in the example) This is a preview performance that visibly displays the following. That is, when the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] will be executed while the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] becomes visible. .

In this embodiment, when the second effect in the connected zone effect is executed, a special background image representing a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the words "Battle ZONE" is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. 25TM200B [4th layer] is displayed. At this time, since the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], which is a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, has been erased by the end of the first effect, the special background image 25TM200B [second layer] has been erased. 4 layers] are visible.

In this embodiment, the connection zone performance is a performance that is always executed when a blackout performance is executed at the time of winning, and it is a performance that is developed into a super reach with high expectations for a jackpot (battle B performance or battle C performance). The performance is such that it is certain that one of these will be executed. That is, determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect when winning a prize corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the connection zone effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the connection zone effect is always executed after the winning blackout effect is executed, but the connection zone effect is not limited to such a form. A pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed and a pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the winning blackout effect is executed may be provided. If the effect is executed according to a pattern in which the connection zone effect is executed after the winning blackout effect is executed, the effect is executed according to the pattern in which the connection zone effect is not executed after the winning blackout effect is executed. The expectation level of the jackpot may be higher (the ratio of execution of either the battle B effect or the battle C effect may be higher) than in the case where the game is executed.

Specifically, the connection zone effect that accompanies the blackout effect at the time of winning is such that after the start winning, a variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display that is the target of the connection zone effect accompanying the blackout effect at the time of winning) starts. By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing, the display result of the variable display being executed (the variable display for which the start condition has been met) is displayed. It will be performed as a preview performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the background image [fourth layer] and the decorative pattern [ The visibility of the third layer] and the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see. That is, by executing the first effect in the connection zone effect after the winning blackout effect, the background image [fourth layer] continues to be difficult to see, and the decorative pattern [third layer] is also difficult to see. This will continue, and the difficult-to-see state of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] will also continue.

Here, due to the connection zone effect after the blackout effect at the time of winning, the background image [4th layer], decorative design [3rd layer], and corresponding display (pending display, active display) [3rd layer] will continue to be displayed. Although the state becomes difficult to visually recognize, the value of the number of reserved memories [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] remain visible. In other words, the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer] that was displayed as a background image, the decorative pattern [3rd layer] that was variably displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decoration pattern [3rd layer] that was displayed in the reserved display area 25TM011. While the visibility of the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] and the normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer] displayed in the active display area 25TM013 decreases, the first pending storage number display Variation in "0" [first layer] displayed in area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] displayed in second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. The visibility of the displayed small designs [first layer] has not deteriorated.

(Example of blackout effect and connection zone effect when winning a prize)
FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a winning blackout effect and a connection zone effect displayed on the image display device 5. 9-5 (1) to (6) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when a winning blackout effect is executed as a pre-read preview effect, and FIG. -5(7) and (8) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when a connection zone effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative A variable display of the symbols [third layer] is being executed, and a variable display of the small symbols [first layer] is being executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays, in the active display area 25TM013, an active display 25TM003 [third layer] in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first pending memory number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), when the variable display of the decorative pattern [third layer] is being executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start is performed. It is assumed that a prize has been won and the number of first reserved memories has become 2. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the first pending storage number has increased to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 executes a blackout effect at the time of winning based on the command at the time of starting winning (determination result at the time of starting winning), and creates a first blackout image as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer, and the pending display 25TM001 in the normal mode in the pending display area 25TM011. Based on receiving a command indicating that one [third layer] has been continuously arranged and the number of first pending memories has increased, a normal mode pending display 25TM001 is displayed in the first pending display area 25TM0011. has been newly placed. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (pending display) , active display) The visibility of the third layer has decreased, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 2, the production control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols [first layer] in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the second layer and the first layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 Even if the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are displayed. 1 layer] and the small design [first layer] have not decreased in visibility.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), the effect control CPU 120 converts the image of the second layer into a first black image after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the winning blackout effect. The out image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is changed to the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the production control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout production, and displays the first special symbol as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. 2 blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "243") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the third layer, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [in the normal mode] in the pending display area 25TM011. 3rd layer] are consecutively arranged. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (pending display) , active display) The visibility of the third layer has decreased, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 2, the production control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (in this example, "243") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "miss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the second layer and the first layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are displayed. 1 layer] and the small design [first layer] have not decreased in visibility.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout performance, and the image display device The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of No. 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command. let In addition, in the third layer, the performance control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the number of first pending memories becomes 1, and also displays the pending display. The normal pending display 25TM001 displayed in the area 25TM011 is shifted one by one to the active display area 25TM013. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (pending display) , active display) The visibility of the third layer has decreased, making it difficult to see.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the second layer and the first layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are displayed. 1 layer] and the small design [first layer] have not decreased in visibility.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout performance, and the image display device The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of No. 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "134") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the third layer, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [in the normal mode] in the pending display area 25TM011. 3rd layer] is continuously arranged. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] as the covering image, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (pending display) , active display) The visibility of the third layer has decreased, making it difficult to see.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (in this example, "134") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "miss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the second layer and the first layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 Even if the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are displayed. 1 layer] and the small design [first layer] have not decreased in visibility.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 ends the winning blackout performance and executes the connection zone performance. do. Specifically, the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is erased and a flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the words "Battle ZONE" is created as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. layer].

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command. let In addition, in the third layer, the performance control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 as the first pending storage number becomes 0, and also displays the pending display. The normal mode pending display 25TM001 displayed in the area 25TM011 is deleted. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the background image placed in the fourth layer from the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] to represent a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the words "Battle ZONE". It is changed to a special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer].

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the fourth layer, the third layer, and the second layer, so the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] as the covering image, the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as the background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [ The visibility of the third layer] has decreased, making it difficult to see.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority of each layer increases in the order of the second layer and the first layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 Even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed, "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 and "0" [first layer] in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025. ], and the visibility of the small pattern [first layer] has not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (7), at a timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 switches the image display device while continuing to execute the connection zone effect. Delete the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] from 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013 in the third layer. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern on the fourth layer.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, since no cover image is displayed on the second layer, which has a higher display priority than the fourth layer and the third layer, it is treated as a special background image. The visibility of the background image 25TM200B [fourth layer], the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display) [third layer] is improved and becomes visible.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 continuously displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second pending storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, even if the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased, "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015, the second pending memory The visibility of "0" [first layer] in the number display area 25TM025 and the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated.

(Flash performance when winning)
As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the flash performance at the time of winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning flash performance is a preview performance that causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to emit light based on the fact that it has been decided to execute the winning flash performance at the time of starting winning.

In this embodiment, a determination process for starting winning is performed based on the occurrence of a starting winning, and a command for starting winning based on the determination result is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Since the performance control CPU 120 executes the flash performance at the time of winning based on the command at the time of starting winning, the execution timing of the flash performance at winning is immediately after the occurrence of the starting winning (starting condition is met). , the timing is within a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds (100 ms)) after a starting winning occurs (starting conditions are met). For the player, the winning flash effect is felt to be executed at the timing when the starting winning occurs (timing when the starting conditions are met), so the timing at which the winning flash effect is executed is the timing when the starting winning occurs. It can also be said that this is the timing when the starting conditions are satisfied.

Specifically, the winning flash effect is a variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the starting condition is met) by causing the light emitting body 25TM100 to emit light at the timing of the starting winning based on the determination result at the starting winning. However, the display result of the variable display for which the starting condition is not satisfied may indicate a jackpot. In this case, the winning flash effect is executed as a pre-read preview effect.

In addition, the winning flash effect is executed by causing the light emitting body 25TM100 to emit light at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) starts after the winning start. It may be executed as a preview performance during fluctuation that suggests the display result of a fluctuation display (a fluctuation display in which the start condition is satisfied). In this case, the winning flash performance is executed as a preview performance during fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the winning flash effect is started based on the determination result at the time of starting a winning, the winning flash effect is a variable display corresponding to the starting winning (a variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect). ) (in this example, the timing at which reach is established) is assumed to continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the start of the winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to perform a flash sound effect that reproduces and outputs a sound effect (flash sound effect, etc.) that notifies the execution of the winning flash effect. .

As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes in which the light emitting body 25TM100, which is a light emitting device, emits light in different colors as presentation modes of the flash presentation upon winning. In the starting winning performance determination process, if it is decided to execute the winning flash performance, the performance mode of the winning flash performance is either a "white light emission mode" or a "red light emission mode". determined.

In the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, the performance control CPU 120 causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white at the timing of the starting winning. Then, control is executed to cause the light emitting body 25TM100 to continuously flash in white from the timing of the starting prize to the timing of super reach development in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). do. In addition, in the winning flash effect in the white light emission mode, at the start of the winning flash effect, the light emitting sound effect A is played and output once as a sound effect to notify the execution of the winning flash effect using the speakers 8L and 8R. shall be

In the prize winning flash performance in the red light emitting mode, the performance control CPU 120 causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in red at the timing of the starting winning. Then, control is executed to cause the light emitting body 25TM100 to continuously flash in red from the timing of the starting prize to the timing of super reach development in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning). do. In addition, in the winning flash effect in the red lighting mode, at the start of the winning flash effect, the light emitting sound effect B is played and output once as a sound effect to notify the execution of the winning flash effect using the speakers 8L and 8R. shall be

In this way, the color of the light emitted from the light emitting body 25TM100 is different between the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode (white in the white light emitting mode and red in the red light emitting mode). In addition, in this embodiment, the blinking interval of the light emitting body 25TM100 (the ON/OFF interval of light emission of the light emitting body 25TM100) is the same for the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the blinking interval of the light emitting body 25TM100 may be different between the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode and the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode. The blinking interval may be shorter (the light emitting cycle is shorter) in the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode than in the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the light emitting sound effect is output only once at the timing when the winning flash effect starts (timing of starting winning), but this is not limited to this form. A light emitting sound effect is output not only at the timing when the flash effect is started, but also at a predetermined timing during the period in which the winning flash effect is being executed (for example, the timing when a variable display including a target variable display is started). You can do it like this.

(Chance effect)
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 can execute the chance production based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. Chance eye production is an enlarged mode in which the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is either (a) a combination of even numbered symbols or (b) a combination of odd numbered symbols, and the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed. This is a preview performance that stops displaying decorative patterns in the display mode.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the chance effect at the time of starting winning with the number of pending memories being 1 or more, (i) the next variable display that is being executed at the time of starting winning; From the fluctuating display to (ii) the fluctuating display immediately before the fluctuating display that is the target of the notice of the chance effect, the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed in a stopped manner in each of the fluctuating displays in (i) and (ii). , a combination of even numbers (for example, "246", "468", etc.) or a combination of odd numbers (for example, "135", "357", etc.), a variable display corresponding to the starting prize ( The display result (variable display in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met) may indicate a jackpot. The chance effect in this case is executed as a look-ahead preview effect.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the chance effect at the time of starting winning with the number of pending memories being 0, (iii) in the variable display that is the preview target of the chance effect, the above-mentioned After temporarily stopping the combination of even-numbered or odd-numbered decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner again (i.e., an operation similar to a pseudo-continuous display), so that the variable display that is being executed (starting condition is The display result of the established fluctuation display may indicate a jackpot. The chance effect in this case is executed as a fluctuating notice effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes for the chance presentation in which the combinations of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (including temporary stoppage) are different. In the starting winning performance determination process, if it is decided to execute the chance performance, the performance mode of the chance performance is determined to be either the "even number mode" or the "odd number mode". (See Figure 9-9(C)).

In addition, in the variable display after the variable display in which the even-numbered chance effect has been performed, the odd-numbered chance effect may be made executable. In this case, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be made higher than in the case where the odd-numbered chance presentation is executed without the even-numbered chance presentation.

(change production)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is to change the pending display 25TM001 or the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of starting winning to a special mode (in this example, a white round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, a white round display). , a white triangle display), a blue mode (in this example, a blue circle display), or a red mode (in this example, a red circle display).

Specifically, among the change effects, a hold change effect that displays the display mode of the pending display 25TM001 in a display mode different from the normal mode (any display mode of a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode) is This is a look-ahead preview effect that suggests the display result of a variable display that has not been executed (a variable display in which the start condition has been met but the start condition has not been met). In addition, among the change effects, an active change effect that displays the display mode of the active display 25TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode (any display mode of a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode) is being executed. This is a preview effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of a fluctuation display (a fluctuation display in which the start condition is met). The timing at which the change effect is executed and the change pattern of the hold display will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-10 to 9-12, which will be described later.

(Comment preview performance)
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the comment preview performance based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The comment preview effect is a display result of a variable display corresponding to the starting prize (a variable display in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not satisfied) along with the mini character in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which a suggestive comment image is displayed.

Specifically, when it is decided to execute a comment preview performance at the time of starting winning, (i) from the variable display following the variable display being executed at the time of starting winning, (ii) of the comment previewing performance. A comment image is displayed together with the mini-character at the start of each of the variable displays (i) to (ii) up to the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the preview target. This presentation mode suggests that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met) will be a jackpot. This comment preview performance is executed as a pre-read preview performance.

In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes in which the characters displayed on the comment image differ as presentation modes for the comment preview presentation. In the start winning performance determination process, the performance mode of the comment preview performance is determined to be either the "first mode" or the "second mode" (see FIGS. 9-10). In the comment preview performance of the first mode, the mini character and the first comment image (the comment image with the words "Next chance?") are displayed, and in the comment preview performance of the second mode, the mini character and the second comment image are displayed. A comment image (a comment image with the words "Look forward to the next one!") is displayed.

In addition, in this comment preview performance, when the comment image is displayed, character voice sounds corresponding to the characters shown in the comment image may be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the comment preview effect of the first aspect is executed, a mini character and a first comment image (a comment image showing the words "Next chance?") are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, a character voice sound of "Next chance?" may be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

<First embodiment>
[Start winning performance decision process]
FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 are a first embodiment of a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The performance control CPU 120 performs the start winning performance determination process of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7 in the pre-read notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Execute.

In the start winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 first sends a set of starting winning commands (for example, symbol designation commands) based on the occurrence of a starting winning to the first starting winning opening. , a variable category command, and a first pending memory number addition designation command) are newly received (step S25TM1000).

The symbol designation command indicates the judgment result of whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether it will be a small hit, or whether it will be a loss (with time reduction) among the judgment results at the time of winning, and if it is judged to be a jackpot. This is an effect control command that shows the determination result of the type of jackpot, and the determination result of the time saving type when it is determined to be a loss (with time saving).

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and whether it will be a loss (time saving), based on the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of starting winning. At the same time, as shown in Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5, based on the random number for type determination extracted at the time of starting winning, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the loss (time saving), etc. ), the time saving type is determined and a symbol designation command that designates the determination result is output. Further, the variable category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variable pattern among the winning determination results. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a normal reach, whether it will be a super reach, etc. based on the random number for fluctuation pattern determination extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a fluctuation category command specifying the determination result. Further, the first pending memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether a set of starting winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first pending memory number addition designation command) is newly stored in the starting winning command storage area. judge. If the command at the time of one set of starting winnings has not been newly received (NO in step S25TM1000), the process is ended as is.

If one set of starting winning commands has been newly received (YES in step S25TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 sets any of the prefetch prohibition flag, the specific flag, or the predetermined flag, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not (step S25TM1010). If any one of the prefetch prohibition flag, the specific flag, and the predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the process is immediately terminated. That is, if the prefetch prohibition flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the processes in step S25TM1020 and below are skipped, and if the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the processes in step S25TM1020 and below are skipped. If the process is skipped and the predetermined flag is set (YES in step S25TM1010), the processes from step S25TM1020 onwards will be skipped.

If none of the prefetching prohibition flag, the specific flag, and the predetermined flag are set (NO in step S25TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 displays the reserved storage information corresponding to the starting winning earlier than the starting winning. Determine whether all the results (judgment results at the time of starting winning) are "lost (no time saving)" and the displayed results of the variable display being executed are "missing (no time saving)" (step S25TM1020).

Whether any of the display results of the retained memory information corresponding to the starting winnings prior to the starting winnings (judgment results at the time of starting winnings) is not a "miss" (no time saving), or the display result of the variable display being executed. If it is not "miss (no time saving)" (NO in step S25TM1020), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

The display results of the reserved memory information corresponding to the starting winnings earlier than the starting winnings (judgment results at the time of starting winnings) are all "missing (no time saving)", and the displaying results of the variable display being executed are If it is a "miss (no time saving)" (YES in step S25TM1020), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the timing at which the starting winning occurred is in the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period in the variable display being executed. , or any period (step S25TM1030).

(Design stop period, design confirmation period)
In this embodiment, as shown in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 8-24 described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 078IWS804). The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. The process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Then, as shown in the variable display performance processing in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 078IWS841), and sets the variable time timer by 1. Subtract (step S078IWS842).

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 stops displaying the combination of decorative symbols based on the display control execution data and notifies the display result to the timing when the design confirmation designation command is received and the transition to the symbol confirmation period begins. The period is set as the pattern stop period. In the pattern stop period, the decorative pattern stops displaying (swinging stops) to notify the display result of the fluctuation, and also to notify that the fluctuation display has not ended yet. In addition, in this embodiment, the period including the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period is referred to as a specific period.

FIG. 9-8 is a timing chart for explaining the symbol stop period and symbol confirmation period in each variation pattern when the display result is "miss (no time saving)". Figure 9-8 (A) shows the symbol stop period and symbol confirmation when the display result is "miss (no time saving)" and the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach miss" or "normal reach miss". It is a timing chart for explaining a period. In addition, Figure 9-8 (B) shows that when the display result is "miss (no time saving)", the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A missed", "super reach B missed", It is a timing chart for explaining a symbol stop period and a symbol confirmation period when either of the following occurs (or "super reach C is off").

As shown in Figure 9-8 (A), when the display result is "miss (no time saving)" and the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach missed" or "normal reach missed", the performance control The CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern and then subtracts the value of the variable time timer by 1 as the variable display progresses, and starts displaying the decorative pattern at a timing 0.5 seconds before the variable time timer times out (timing T1A). Stop and display the pattern. The timing of T1A is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, when the variable time timer times out and the design confirmation designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the decorative design (timing T2A). The timing of T2A is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the symbol confirmation period at the timing (timing T3A) when 0.5 seconds have passed after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (after the variable time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "missing (no time saving)" and the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach missing" or "normal reach missing", the period from the timing of T1A to the timing of T3A is set as a specific period. (0.5+0.5=1 second).

As shown in Figure 9-8 (B), when the display result is "miss (no time saving)", the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A missed", "super reach B missed"). , or "super reach C is off"), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols and then subtracts the value of the variable time timer by 1 as the variable display progresses, and The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a timing 2 seconds before the timer times out (timing T1B). This timing of T1B is the start timing of the symbol stop period. Then, when the variable time timer times out and the design confirmation designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the decorative design (timing T2B). The timing of this T2B is the end timing of the symbol stop period and the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the symbol confirmation period at the timing (timing T3B) when 0.5 seconds have passed after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (after the variable time timer times out). Therefore, when the display result is "miss (no time saving)", the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach A missed", "super reach B missed", or "super reach C missed"). In either case, the period from the timing of T1B to the timing of T3B is set as a specific period (2+0.5=2.5 seconds).

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern is either "non-reach off" or "normal reach off", the symbol stop period is 0.5 seconds (period from T1A to T2A). On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns with super reach ("super reach A is off", "super reach B is off", or "super reach C is off"), the symbol stop period is 2 seconds (T1B ~ T2B period). Therefore, the symbol stop period is a period that differs depending on the fluctuation pattern.

Further, when the variation pattern is either "non-reach out" or "normal reach out", the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds (period from T2A to T3A). Also, when the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns with super reach ("super reach A is off", "super reach B is off", or "super reach C is off"), the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds ( period from T2B to T3B). Therefore, the symbol determination period is a constant period regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

If the timing at which the start-up winning occurs is the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period in the variable display being executed (that is, in the specific period) (YES in step S25TM1030), the performance control CPU 120 executes the process in step S25TM1090. Proceed with the process.

If the timing at which the starting winning occurs is neither the symbol stop period in the variable display being executed nor the symbol confirmation period (that is, it is not a specific period) (NO in step S25 TM1030), the performance control The CPU 120 determines that the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation category command, is a fluctuation pattern with either super reach B or super reach C ("super reach B is off", "super reach B jackpot", "super reach C hit", or "super reach C jackpot") (step S25TM1040).

The fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by either Super Reach B or Super Reach C (if the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach B is off", "Super Reach B jackpot", "Super Reach C is off", or "Super Reach C jackpot") (NO in step S25TM1040), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1090.

It is a fluctuation pattern that involves either Super Reach B or Super Reach C (Whether the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach B Missing", "Super Reach B Jackpot", "Super Reach C Missing", or "Super Reach C Jackpot") (YES in step S25TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the table for determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (FIG. 9-9 ( Determine based on A).

(Table to determine whether or not to execute blackout effect when winning a prize)
FIG. 9-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform a blackout effect when winning a prize. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the blackout effect upon winning varies depending on the display result.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (no time saving)"), the performance control CPU 120 %, it is decided not to perform the blackout effect when winning a prize, and it is decided to execute the blackout effect when winning a prize, at a rate of 1%.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the production control CPU 120 %, it is decided not to perform the blackout effect when winning a prize.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot"), the performance control CPU 120 performs a blackout at the time of winning at a rate of 40%. It is decided not to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning a prize at a rate of 60%.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small winning"), the production control CPU 120 executes the winning at a rate of 100%. It is decided not to execute the blackout effect.

In this way, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (with time saving)" or "small hit" (in other words, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (with time saving)" or "small hit" 100% of the time, it is determined that the blackout effect will not be executed at the time of winning. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (no time saving)" or "jackpot" (in other words, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)" or "jackpot" In either case), it has been decided that a blackout effect will be executed at the time of winning at a rate of 1 to 60%. Therefore, at the time when the winning blackout effect is executed, it is confirmed that the display result will be a "loss (no time saving)" or a "jackpot".

In addition, even if the determination result at the time of starting winning is either "loss (with time saving)" or "small win", the determination value may be allocated so that the blackout effect at the time of winning can be executed. For example, if the judgment result at the time of the first winning is either "Lose (with time saving)" or "Small hit", the percentage will be higher than when the judgment result at the first winning is "Lose (with no time saving)". The blackout effect may be executed at the time of winning a prize, and the blackout effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the judgment result at the time of starting a winning is "lost (no time saving)". Good too. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (with time saving)" or "small hit", the percentage of winnings will be black at a lower rate than when the judgment result at starting winning is "big hit". The out performance may be executed, and the blackout effect at the time of winning may be executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot". For example, if the judgment result at the time of the first winning is either "Lose (with time saving)" or "Small hit", the percentage will be higher than when the judgment result at the first winning is "Lose (with no time saving)". Therefore, the winning blackout performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the winning blackout effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the winning blackout effect is not executed.

When the process of step S25TM1050 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the blackout performance at the time of winning (step S25TM1060). If it is determined not to perform the blackout effect upon winning (NO in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1090.

If it is determined to execute a blackout effect when winning a prize (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 sets a first look-ahead counter (step S25TM1070), which will be described later, and sets a specific flag, which will be described later. (Step S25TM1080), and the process advances to Step S25TM1090.

The value corresponding to the first pending memory number updated based on the starting winnings (the value specified by the first pending memory number designation command) is set in the first look-ahead counter, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Each time the process is executed (each time the first pending storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the first look-ahead counter is decremented by one. That is, each time the pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the pending memory that is the subject of determination at the time of starting winning is shifted, the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the first look-ahead counter becomes 0, the target variable display is executed. Note that a second prefetch counter, a third prefetch counter, and a fourth prefetch counter, which will be described later, are also subtracted in the same manner as the first prefetch counter.

During the period when the specific flag is set, even if a new starting prize occurs, the determination in step S25TM1010 mentioned above is YES, and the winning corresponding to the new starting winning (new first pending memory) is determined. When the blackout effect is not executed. The specific flag is cleared when the variable display (so-called target variation) that is the subject of the winning blackout effect ends.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation category command, is "non-reachable" (step S25TM1090). When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S25TM1090), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

If the fluctuation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S25TM1090), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance at the time of winning and the performance mode. (Step S25TM1100).

(Whether or not flash effects will be executed when winning a prize and effect mode determination table)
FIG. 9-9(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning a prize and the effect mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B), determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the winning flash effect varies depending on the display result.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (no time saving)"), the production control CPU 120 %, it was decided not to perform the winning flash effect, 8% of the time it was decided to execute the winning flash effect with a white light emitting mode, and 2% of the time it was decided to execute a winning flash effect with a red light emitting mode. decided to carry out.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the production control CPU 120 %, it is decided not to perform the winning flash effect, and 10%, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in a white light emitting mode.

When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot"), the production control CPU 120 performs a flash production at the time of winning at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to perform this, it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in a white light emitting mode at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect in a red light emitting mode at a 50% rate.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small winning"), the production control CPU 120 executes the winning at a rate of 100%. It is decided not to perform the flash effect.

In this way, if the judgment result at the start of winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"), the flash effect at the time of winning will be performed at a rate of 100%. has decided not to implement it. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot" (in other words, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)" It has been decided that the winning flash effect will be executed at a rate of 10 to 70% in the case of any of the following: ``No time saving'', ``Lose (with time saving)'', or ``Jackpot''. Therefore, at the time the winning flash effect is executed, the display result is other than "small win" ("loss (no time saving)", "loss (with time saving)", or "jackpot"). result).

In addition, even if the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "small win", the determination value may be allocated so that the flash performance at the time of winning can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(B), when the winning flash effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the winning flash performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot increases in the order of the winning flash performance in the white light emitting mode<the winning flash performance in the red light emitting mode.

When the process of step S25TM1100 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it has been decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step S25TM1110). If it is determined not to perform the winning flash effect (NO in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

If it is determined to execute a flash effect upon winning (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets a second look-ahead counter (step S25TM1120), and sets a predetermined flag (described later) (step S25TM1110). S25TM1130), the process advances to step S25TM1140.

During the period in which the predetermined flag is set, even if a new starting prize occurs, the determination of YES in step S25TM1010 described above will result in the winning corresponding to the new starting winning (new first pending memory). When the flash effect is not executed. The predetermined flag is cleared when the variable display (so-called target variation) that was the object of the winning flash effect is completed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines that all of the fluctuation patterns of the pending storage information corresponding to the starting winnings before the starting winning are "non-reach out" and that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuating display being executed is "non-reaching". It is determined whether the reach is off (step S25TM1140). If any of the fluctuation patterns of the retained memory information corresponding to the starting winnings before the starting winning is not "out of reach", or if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuating display being executed is not "outside of reaching", then (NO in step S25TM1140), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

If all the fluctuation patterns of the retained memory information corresponding to the starting winnings before the starting winning are "out of reach", and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display being executed is "outside of reaching", then (YES in step S25TM1140), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the chance production and the production mode based on a table for determining whether to execute the chance production and the production mode (step S25TM1150).

(Table for determining whether or not to perform a chance effect and the effect mode)
FIG. 9-9(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform a chance effect and the effect mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), the determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the chance effect is different depending on the display result.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (no time saving)"), the performance control CPU 120 It was decided not to execute the chance effect at a rate of %, it was decided to execute the chance effect in an even number mode at a rate of 4%, and it was decided to execute the chance effect in an odd number mode at a rate of 1%. decide.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the production control CPU 120 executes 92 It was decided not to execute the chance effect at a rate of %, it was decided to execute an even-numbered chance effect at a rate of 6%, and it was decided to execute an even-numbered chance effect at a rate of 2%. decide.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot"), the production control CPU 120 performs a chance production at a rate of 85%. It is decided not to execute it, it is decided to execute the even-numbered chance effect at a rate of 8%, and it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance effect at a 7% rate.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"), the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance win at a rate of 100%. Decide not to perform the performance.

In this way, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"), the chance effect will be performed at a rate of 100%. I have decided not to do it. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot" (in other words, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)" It has been decided to perform the chance effect at a rate of 5 to 15% in the case of any of the following: ``No time saving'', ``Lose (with time saving)'', or ``Jackpot''). Therefore, when the chance effect is executed, the display result is other than "small hit" (any display result of "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot". ) is confirmed.

In addition, even if the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "small win", the determination value may be allocated so that the chance effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(C), when the chance effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the chance effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the chance effect is executed, the expectation level of the jackpot increases in the order of the chance effect in the even number mode<the chance effect in the odd number mode.

After completing the process of step S25TM1150, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance performance (step S25TM1160). If it is determined not to execute the chance effect (NO in step S25TM1160), the effect control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1185.

If it is determined to execute the chance effect (YES in step S25TM1110), the effect control CPU 120 sets a third prefetch counter (step S25TM1170), and sets a prefetch prohibition flag (described later) (step S25TM1110). S25TM1180), the process advances to step S25TM1185.

During the period in which the prefetch prohibition flag is set, even if a new starting winning occurs, YES is determined in step S25TM1010 described above, so that the new starting winning (new first pending memory) is handled. Chance production is not executed. The pre-reading prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the chance effect is completed.

The prefetch prohibition flag is also set when it is decided to execute a comment preview effect (YES at step S25TM1200) or when it is decided to execute a change effect (YES at step S25TM1240). Ru. Similar to the case where this look-ahead prohibition flag is also decided to execute the chance effect, during the period when the look-ahead prohibition flag is set, even if a new starting prize occurs, YES is determined in step S25TM1010 mentioned above. As a result of this determination, the comment preview performance and change performance corresponding to the new starting prize winning (new first pending memory) are not executed. The prefetch prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the comment preview performance or the change performance ends.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the updated first pending memory number based on the occurrence of the starting prize (the first pending memory number including the pending memory corresponding to the starting winning) is 2 or more. is determined (step S25TM1185). If the first pending memory number after the update based on the occurrence of the starting prize (the first pending memory number including the pending memory corresponding to the starting winning) is less than 2 (NO in step S25TM1185), the production The control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

If the first pending memory number after the update based on the occurrence of the starting winning (the first holding memory number including the holding memory corresponding to the starting winning) is 2 or more (YES in step S25TM1185), the production The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the comment preview performance and the performance mode based on a table (see FIGS. 9-10) for determining whether or not to perform the comment preview performance and the performance mode (step S25TM1190). In other words, if the first pending memory number after the update based on the occurrence of the starting prize (the first pending memory number including the pending memory corresponding to the starting winning) is 2 or more, the comment preview performance is executed. The presence or absence is determined, but if it is 0 or 1, it is not determined whether or not the comment preview performance will be executed (the comment preview performance cannot be executed).

Not limited to this form, the execution or non-execution of the comment preview performance is determined (the process of step S25TM1190 is executed) based on the number of first pending memories (including the pending memory corresponding to the starting prize). The number of memories) may be 3 or more, or may be 4 or more.

(Table for determining whether or not to perform comment preview performance and performance mode)
FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform a comment preview performance and the performance mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the comment preview effect differs depending on the display result.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (no time saving)"), the performance control CPU 120 It is decided not to execute the comment preview effect at a rate of 18%, it is decided to execute the comment preview effect of the first mode at a rate of 18%, and the comment preview effect of the second mode is executed at a rate of 2%. I decided to do so.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the production control CPU 120 It is decided not to execute the comment preview effect at a rate of %, it is decided to execute the comment preview effect of the first mode at a rate of 20%, and the comment preview effect of the second mode is executed at a rate of 5%. I decided to do so.

The performance control CPU 120 performs a comment preview performance at a rate of 60% when the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot"). It is decided not to carry out the execution, it is decided to execute the comment preview effect of the first mode at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute the comment preview effect of the second mode at a rate of 30%.

The performance control CPU 120 issues a comment notice at a rate of 100% when the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"). Decide not to perform the performance.

In this way, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"), the comment preview effect will be performed at a rate of 100%. I have decided not to do it. On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot" (in other words, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)" It has been decided that a comment preview performance will be performed at a rate of 20 to 40% in the case of a winning result (no time saving), a loss (with time saving), or a jackpot. Therefore, at the time the comment preview performance is executed, the display result is other than "small hit" (any display result of "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot". ) is confirmed.

In addition, even if the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "small win", a determination value may be allocated so that the comment preview performance can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10, when the comment preview effect is executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is higher than when the comment preview effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the comment preview performance is executed, the expectation level of the jackpot increases in the order of the comment preview performance in the first mode<the comment preview performance in the second mode.

After completing the process of step S25TM1190, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the comment preview performance (step S25TM1200). If it is determined not to execute the comment preview performance (NO in step S25TM1200), the performance control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1230.

If it is determined to execute the comment preview performance (YES in step S25TM1200), the performance control CPU 120 sets the fourth prefetch counter (step S25TM1210) and sets the prefetch prohibition flag (step S25TM1220). , the process proceeds to step S25TM1230.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the change performance and the final display mode of the active display based on a table (see FIG. 9-11) for determining whether or not to execute the change performance and the final display mode of the active display. Determine (step S25TM1230).

(Table for determining whether to execute change effects and final display mode of active display)
FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to perform a change effect and the final display mode of active display. As shown in FIG. 9-11, in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 25TM003 is any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "special mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". It is possible to determine whether or not this is the case, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

As shown in Figure 9-11, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)") The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize (new first pending memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70%, and the display mode at a rate of 10%. It becomes a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 15%, and a red mode (red circle display) at a 5% rate.

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "Losing (with time saving)"), the starting winning (new winning) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 that corresponds to the variable display based on 1 pending memory) is a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 65%, and a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%. , at a rate of 20%, it becomes a blue mode (displayed in a blue circle), and at a rate of 5%, it becomes a red mode (displayed in a red circle).

If the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "jackpot" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "jackpot"), a variable display based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to 25TM003 is a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 30%, a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 5%, and a blue mode at a rate of 25%. (displayed as a blue circle), and a red mode (displayed as a red circle) occurs at a rate of 40%.

If the judgment result at the time of the starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small winning"), the starting winning is based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory). The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 100%.

In this way, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a "small hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is a "small hit"), the change effect will be executed at a rate of 100%. (The final display mode of the active display 25TM003 should be the normal mode (white round display)). On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is either "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot" (in other words, the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)" If the result is any of the following: ``No time saving)'', ``Lose (with time saving)'', or ``Jackpot''), the change performance should be executed at a rate of 30 to 70% (the final display mode of the active display 25TM003, A special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (red circle display) that is different from the normal mode (white circle display) has been decided. ing. Therefore, at the time when the change performance is executed, the display result is other than "small hit" (any display result of "miss (no time saving)", "miss (with time saving)", or "jackpot") It is confirmed that

Incidentally, even if the determination result at the time of starting winning is a "small win", the determination value may be allocated so that the change effect can be executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the active display 25TM003 is displayed in a special mode (white triangular display) different from the normal mode (white round display), in a blue mode (blue round display), or in a red mode ( The effect displayed in the form of a red circle is called a change effect (active change effect). Therefore, the final display mode of the active display can be changed to a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (red circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). Deciding to do so means executing a change effect (active change effect) in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any display mode of a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode). This corresponds to making a decision.

On the other hand, determining the final display mode of the active display to be the normal mode (white round display) corresponds to deciding not to perform the change performance (active change performance and pending change performance).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the change performance (step S25TM1240). If it has been decided not to perform the change effect (NO in step S25TM1240), the process is immediately terminated.

If it has been decided to execute the change effect (YES in step 07 TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 converts the change pattern of the change effect into the change effect change pattern determination table (FIGS. 9-12 and 9- 13) (step S25TM1250), sets the fifth prefetch counter (step S25TM1260), sets the prefetch prohibition flag (step S25TM1270), and ends the process.

(Change pattern determination table for change production)
FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for determining change patterns of change effects. When the first pending memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the starting winning, (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 ( (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) timing at which the pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a higher position (on the active display area 25TM013 side) in the pending display area 25TM011 (in the case of n≧2) , and (iii) At the timing when the pending display 25TM001 corresponding to the starting prize shifts to the active display area 25TM013 (timing at which the active display 25TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), a variable display based on the starting winning is displayed. There is a possibility that the display information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to the above may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner due to the change effect.

In FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, for each change pattern, the display mode of the display information (pending display 25TM001 or active display 25TM003) corresponding to the fluctuating display at each timing of (i) to (iii) is shown. It shows what will happen. In the change patterns shown in Figures 9-12 and 9-13, "Normal" indicates a normal mode with a white round display, and "Special" indicates a special mode with a white triangle display. "Blue" indicates a blue mode in which a blue circle is displayed, and "red" indicates a red mode in which a red circle is displayed.

([For 1 pending item] Change pattern determination table for change performance)
When the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 executes the [1 pending] change performance shown in FIG. 9-12 (1). Select the change pattern determination table.

In addition, in the explanation of FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, active shift means that the pending display 25TM001 shifts from the pending display area 25TM011 to the active display area 25TM013 (as a result, the pending display 25TM001 becomes the subject of judgment at the time of starting winning. The active display 25TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode, and then the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). In this case, or in the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Long (with time saving)" (The display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Long (with time saving)") ), the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 60%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%. There is.

In addition, in the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 101 is The determination values are allocated such that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Here, if the special mode is determined as the final display mode and becomes the normal mode at the timing of active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201 (described later), change pattern 301 (described later), change pattern 401 (described later)), case), the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode after the active shift. In addition, if a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), the active display 25TM003 remains in the special mode and does not change after the active shift.

If the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 101, change pattern 102, change pattern 103, change pattern 104, and change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning a prize at the start, and then the pending display of the notice subject is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target is displayed in a blue color, and then the pending display of the preview target remains in the blue color at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 will be changed at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 101 is 10%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned to be determined by .

Here, if the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, if the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and becomes a special mode at the timing of active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change pattern In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the special mode to the blue mode. In addition, if the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205, change pattern 304 and change pattern described later), In the case of pattern 305, change pattern 404, and change pattern 405), the active display 25TM003 remains in the blue state and does not change after the active shift.

If the determined final display mode is a red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 101, change pattern 102, change pattern 103, change pattern 104, change pattern 105, change pattern 106, and change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting a prize winning, and then the pending display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in red, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in red at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 101 will be changed at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 101 is 4. %, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Here, if the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , After the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203, change pattern 302 and change pattern described later), In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), after the active shift, the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the special mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205, change pattern 304 and change pattern described later), In the case of pattern 304, change pattern 404, and change pattern 405), the active display 25TM003 will finally change from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, if the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of active shift (change pattern 106 and change pattern 107, change pattern 206 to change pattern 208, change pattern 306 to change described later), In the case of pattern 310, change pattern 406 to change pattern 410), the active display 25TM003 remains in the red state and does not change after the active shift.

([For 2 pending items] Change pattern determination table for change effects)
When the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 executes the [2 pending] change performance shown in FIG. 9-12 (2). Select the change pattern determination table.

If the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 201, change pattern 202, and change pattern 203, respectively. The change pattern 202 is to display the pending display of the notice target in a normal mode at the time of starting winning, then change the pending display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the pending display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the display does not change in a special mode, and change pattern 203 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target remains in a special mode and does not change at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). , or if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is at a rate of 60%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 201 is 40% The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

If the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 201, change pattern 202, change pattern 203, change pattern 204, and change pattern 205, respectively. In the change pattern 204, the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, then the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 205 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target is displayed in blue at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the preview target is changed to blue at the timing of the first pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 will be changed at a rate of 40%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 201 is 10%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned to be determined by .

If the determined final display mode is a red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 201, change pattern 202, change pattern 203, change pattern 204, change pattern 205, change pattern 206, change pattern 207, and change pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 206, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the notice target does not change in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern that changes the pending display of the preview target to red color, and the change pattern 207 is to display the pending display of the preview target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then change the pending display of the preview target to red color at the timing of the first hold shift. Change pattern 208 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in red mode at the timing of active shift and the pending display of the notice target is displayed in red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first time. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target remains in the red state at the timing of the hold shift and does not change while the hold display of the notice target remains in the red state at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). In this case, or if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (with time saving)"), the change pattern 201 is 35%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 201 is 2%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 20%.

([For 3 pending items] Change pattern determination table for change effects)
When the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 executes the [3 pending] change performance shown in FIG. 9-13 (3). Select the change pattern determination table.

If the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to each of change pattern 301, change pattern 302, and change pattern 303. In the change pattern 302, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode and the pending display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of active shift.Change pattern 303 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of active shift. After displaying in a special mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target remains in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). In this case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 is at a rate of 60%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 301 is 40% The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

If the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 301, change pattern 302, change pattern 303, change pattern 304, and change pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 304, after displaying the pending display of the preview target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the preview target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the pending display of the notice target is changed to a blue state at the timing of active shift.Change pattern 305 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is changed to a blue state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in blue mode, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains blue and does not change, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains blue and does not change. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target remains in the blue state at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 will be changed at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 301 is 10% The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned to be determined by .

If the determined final display mode is a red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are determined for change pattern 301, change pattern 302, change pattern 303, change pattern 304, change pattern 305, change pattern 306, change pattern 307, change pattern 308, change pattern 309, and change pattern 310, respectively. Allocated. In the change pattern 306, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the time of active shift, and the pending display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of active shift.Change pattern 307 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the time of starting winning. After displaying, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains in the special mode and does not change, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains in the special mode and becomes active. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target changes to red at the timing of the shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 301 will be changed at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 10%. , change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 2%, change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 2%, change The determination values are assigned so that the pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. The change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 8%.

([For 4 pending items] Change pattern determination table for change effects)
When the first pending memory number stored in the first pending memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 executes the [4 pending] change performance shown in FIG. 9-13 (4). Select the change pattern determination table.

If the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 401, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403, respectively. In the change pattern 402, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. At the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the normal mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode. Change pattern 403 is a change pattern in which the pending display subject to notice is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display subject to notice is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first pending shift. , at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the special mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target remains unchanged in a special mode.

In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). Or, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is at a rate of 60%. The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 401 is 40% The determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

If the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 401, change pattern 402, change pattern 403, change pattern 404, and change pattern 405, respectively. In the change pattern 404, the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, then the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and the timing of the second pending shift is changed. At the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the normal mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the hold display of the notice target changes to blue mode. Change pattern 405 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in a blue state at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift. , At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains blue and does not change, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains blue and does not change, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the preview target remains in blue.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). In this case, or when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Lose (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Lose (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 will be changed at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned to be determined by .

If the determined final display mode is a red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, loss (no time saving), loss (with time saving), or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to change pattern 401, change pattern 402, change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, and change pattern 410, respectively. It is. In the change pattern 406, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the notice target does not change in the normal mode at the timing of the first pending shift, and then at the timing of the second pending shift. , the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target changes to a special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target changes to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 407 is a change pattern in which, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the pending display of the notice target does not change in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and 2 At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains in the special mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the notice target remains unchanged. The change pattern 408 is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target changes to red mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains unchanged in red mode, and becomes active. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of the notice target in a red state at the timing of the shift, and the change pattern 409 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then at the timing of the first pending shift. Change the hold display of the notice target to red, keep the hold display of the notice target unchanged at the timing of the second hold shift, and change the hold display of the notice target to red at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 410 is such that the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the red state at the time of starting winning, and then 1 At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains red and does not change, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target remains red and does not change, and at the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target remains in the red state and does not change at the timing of the active shift.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (no time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (no time saving)"). , or if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss (with time saving)" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "miss (with time saving)"), the change pattern 401 is 35%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 10%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "Jackpot" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "Jackpot"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 40%.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 9-12 and 9-13, the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is subject to judgment at the time of starting winning can change from the normal mode to a special mode or a blue mode. , and can change from a special mode to a red mode. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is subject to determination at the time of starting winning does not change from the blue mode to any mode, nor does it change from the red mode to any mode. Therefore, the special mode of the pending display is a mode that suggests a change to the red mode, and when the pending display is displayed in a special mode rather than the case where the pending display is displayed in the normal mode. This means that the rate of change to red color is higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the change pattern of the change performance is determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command). Although we have shown an example in which a value is assigned, the judgment value is not limited to this form, and the judgment value can be assigned to the change pattern of the change effect according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the change pattern specified by the change category command). It may be set as being allocated.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the change pattern in which the hold display changes from blue to red is not provided, but the hold display is not limited to this form. A changing pattern that changes from blue to red may be provided. For example, if the number of pending memories becomes 3 based on a starting winning, the pending display corresponding to the starting winning will be displayed in the normal mode (or special mode), and at the time of the first pending shift, the pending display will be changed to the normal mode. A pattern may be provided in which the hold display changes from blue to red depending on the mode (or special mode) and at the time of the second hold shift. If the hold display changes from blue to red late (for example, during the second hold shift), or if the hold display changes from blue to red early (for example, during the first hold shift). The expectation level of the jackpot may be higher than that in the case of . Conversely, if the hold display changes from blue to red early (for example, during the first hold shift), if the hold display changes from blue to red late (for example, during the first hold shift). The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to be higher than that during the second pending shift).

(Example of production when winning a prize in a period different from the specific period)
Next, a new starting winning occurs in a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from both the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period), and in the starting winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, a winning Using Figures 9-14 and 9-15, we will use Figures 9-14 and 9-15 to show examples of effects when it is decided to execute the time blackout effect, connection zone effect, winning flash effect, chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect. explain.

Figure 9-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the winning blackout effect, connection zone effect, winning flash effect, chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image related to each of these performances. In FIGS. 9-15, the mode of the light emitting body 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity of the image display device 5 (upper right corner) in correspondence with the rendering diagram.

In this example, in the start-up winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the winning effect blackout effect in step S25TM1050, and in step S25TM1100, the winning effect flash effect with white light emission mode. In step S25TM1150, it is decided to execute the odd-numbered chance effect, in step S25TM1190, it is decided to execute the comment preview effect in the second mode, and in step S25TM1230, it is decided to execute the final effect of the active display. It is assumed that the display mode is determined to be a red mode, it is determined to execute a change effect, and it is determined that the change pattern is set to the change pattern 208 in step S25TM1250.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-14), the performance control CPU 120 changes the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern [third layer] is displayed in a variable manner, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small pattern [first layer] is displayed in a variable manner. Execute. The performance control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays, in the active display area 25TM013, an active display 25TM003 [third layer] in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first pending memory number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), when the variable display of decorative patterns [third layer] is being executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start is performed. It is assumed that a prize has been won and the first pending storage number has become 2 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the first pending storage number has increased to the production control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout performance based on the received command, and displays the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the pending display area 25TM011. is continuously arranged, and based on receiving a command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased, a pending change effect is executed as a change effect, and a red color is displayed in the first pending display area 25TM0011. Aspect pending display 25TM001C [third layer] is newly arranged. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (pending display 25TM001 in the normal mode) , red pending display 25TM001C, and normal active display 25TM003) The visibility of the [third layer] has decreased and is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 2, the production control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols [first layer] in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, the first black layer is used as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B1 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect in the white light emission mode, causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white, and the light emission sound effect A is reproduced once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 changes the covering image to the first blackout image 25TM300B1 [first blackout image 25TM300B1] after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the winning blackout effect. 2 layer] to a second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]. Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-14), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout performance, and the image display device The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of No. 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "243") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is fixed and stopped. In addition, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the pending display area 25TM011. The red pending display 25TM001C [third layer] is continuously arranged. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (normal mode pending display 25TM001 , red pending display 25TM001C, and normal active display 25TM003) The visibility of the [third layer] has decreased and is in a difficult-to-see state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 2, the production control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (in this example, "243") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, the second black layer is used as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "2" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 9-14), the performance control CPU 120 displays a black screen at the time of winning. The out effect is continuously executed, and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. . In addition, as the first pending storage number becomes 1, the production control CPU 120 arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and also arranges the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the pending display area 25TM011. The red mode pending display 25TM001C [third layer] is shifted by one place to the active display area 25TM013 side, and the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] arranged in the pending display area 25TM011 is deleted. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes the comment preview performance of the second mode, and in the third layer, displays a mini character and a second comment image (the words "Look forward to it next!") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. (Comment image shown) Place [Third layer].

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], the corresponding display (red pending display 25TM001C, Normal mode active display 25TM003) The visibility of the [third layer] and the mini-character and the second comment image [third layer] has decreased, resulting in a state where visibility is difficult (non-display state).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, the second black layer is used as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (5), an odd-numbered chance effect is executed, and a combination of decorative patterns [third layer] (in this example, an odd-numbered pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. combination "135") is stopped in an expanded manner (period T5A-T5B shown in FIGS. 9-14). After that, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning blackout performance at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-14). The second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is continuously displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "135") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is fixed and stopped. In addition, the production control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the pending display area 25TM011. It continues to be placed. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (red pending display 25TM001C) , normal mode active display 25TM003) The visibility of the [third layer] has decreased and it is in a difficult to see state (non-display state).

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (in this example, "135") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, the second black layer is used as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. Even if the out image 25TM300B2 [second layer] is displayed, "1" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, And the visibility of the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable display that is the subject of advance notice of the blackout effect at the time of winning) (see FIG. 9-14). At the timing of T7 shown in FIG. A flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] including the words "Battle ZONE" is displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the display device 5. In addition, the background image of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer] to the special background image 25TM200B [4th layer] representing a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, volcanic smoke, and the words "Battle ZONE". It is changing to In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. . In addition, as the number of first pending memories becomes 0, the performance control CPU 120 executes an active change performance as a change performance, and arranges an active display 25TM003C [third layer] in a red mode in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the red pending display 25TM001C [third layer] displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is erased.

However, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer, the covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is By displaying the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer], the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] as a background image, the decorative pattern [third layer], and the corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [ The visibility of the third layer] has decreased and it is in a state where visibility is difficult (non-display state).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, the flame effect image is used as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. Even if 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed, "0" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, and the small The visibility of the design [first layer] has not deteriorated in any case.
?

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (7), at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (at timing T8 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first operation in the connection zone effect. At the same time as finishing the first effect, the second effect in the connection zone effect is executed (shifting from the first effect to the second effect), and the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is erased and a special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is continuously displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to change the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to arrange the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013 in a red form.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, since no image is displayed on the second layer, which has a higher display priority than the fourth layer and the third layer, the special background image 25TM200B is used as a background image. The visibility of the [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [3rd layer] is improved, and all of them are in a visible state.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 continuously displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second pending storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of second layer < first layer, so whether or not the flame effect image 25TM300F [second layer] is displayed is determined. Regardless, "0" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, and the small pattern [first layer] are all It is visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (8), at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (timing T9 shown in FIG. 9-14), the performance control CPU 120 controls the second The effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer] is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the winning flash performance in the white light emission mode and turns off the light emitting body 25TM100.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop displaying the decorative symbol “7” [third layer] in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a ready-to-reach state. Display the words “Reach!!” [3rd layer] at the top. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013 in red mode.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols [first layer] in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, a small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and a small pattern corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Also in the display area 5r, the small patterns [first layer] are continuously and variably displayed without being stopped and displayed. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 continuously displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second pending storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

Next, at the timing when the fluctuation pattern should be developed to super reach (timing T10 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the connection zone effect and erases the special background image 25TM200B [fourth layer]. Then, execute either the battle B effect or the battle C effect.

(Example of performance when winning a prize in a specific period)
Next, a new starting winning occurs during a specific period (that is, either the pattern stop period or the pattern confirmation period), and in the starting winning presentation determination process of the first embodiment, a winning flash presentation, a chance win, etc. An example of a performance when it is decided to execute a performance, a comment preview performance, and a change performance will be explained using FIGS. 9-16 and 9-17.

Figure 9-16 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the winning flash performance, chance performance, comment preview performance, and change performance, and Figure 9-17 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to each of these performances. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an image. In FIG. 9-17, the mode of the light emitting body 25TM100 is shown in the vicinity of the image display device 5 (upper right corner) in correspondence with the rendering diagram.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines YES in step S25TM1030, thereby skipping step S25TM1050 for determining whether to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, In step S25TM1100, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emission mode, in step S25TM1150 it is decided to execute the chance effect in the odd number mode, and in step S25TM1190, the comment preview effect in the second mode is executed. In step S25TM1230, it is determined that the final display mode of the active display is a red mode, and it is also decided to execute a change effect, and in step S25TM1250, it is determined that the change pattern is the change pattern 208.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-17(1), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 9-16), the performance control CPU 120 changes the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern [third layer] is displayed in a variable manner, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small pattern [first layer] is displayed in a variable manner. Display is running. The performance control CPU 120 displays a normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] representing a sunny landscape including the sky and mountains as a background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays, in the active display area 25TM013, an active display 25TM003 [third layer] in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first pending memory number is 1. Based on this, it is assumed that one pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode is displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-16), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of No. 5, the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "243") is fixed and stopped. Then, it is assumed that when the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "lost (no time saving)" is fixed and stopped, a new starting winning occurs and the first pending memory number becomes 2 (Fig. 9 -16 timing of T2A). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the first pending storage number has increased to the production control CPU 120.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect in the white light emission mode, causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white, and the light emission sound effect A is reproduced once from the speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001 [third layer] in the normal mode in the pending display area 25TM011. is continuously displayed, and based on receiving a command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased, a pending change effect is executed as a change effect, and a red color is displayed in the first pending display area 25TM0011. Aspect pending display 25TM001C [third layer] is newly displayed. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 2, the production control CPU 120 displays "2" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols [first layer] in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is used as the background image. , Decorative pattern [third layer], Corresponding display (normal mode pending display 25TM001, red mode pending display 25TM001C, normal mode active display 25TM003) [third layer], "2" in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 ” [first layer], “0” [first layer] of the second reserved storage number display area 25TM025, and the small pattern [first layer] are all in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 9-16), the effect control CPU 120 changes the white light emission mode. When winning a prize, a flash effect is continuously executed, and the light emitting body 25TM100 blinks in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command. let In addition, as the first pending storage number becomes 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and displays the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the pending display area 25TM011. The red mode pending display 25TM001C [third layer] is shifted one place to the active display area 25TM013 side, and the normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer] displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is deleted. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes the comment preview performance of the second mode, and the mini character 25TM400 and the second comment image 25TM450 (the words "Look forward to the next one!" are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5). Display the comment image) [3rd layer].

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is used as the background image. , Decorative pattern [third layer], Corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" in first pending memory number display area 25TM015 [first layer], Both "0" [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] of the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (4), at the timing when the chance effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance effect in the odd number mode, and displays the image in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , the combination of decorative patterns [third layer] (in this example, the odd-numbered pattern combination "135") is stopped and displayed in an enlarged manner (period T4A to T4B shown in FIG. 9-16). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 causes the active display area 25TM013 to continuously display the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode, and displays the pending display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the pending display area 25TM011. Continue to display. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is used as the background image. , Decorative pattern [third layer], Corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" in first pending memory number display area 25TM015 [first layer], Both "0" [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] of the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T6 shown in FIG. 9-14), the production control CPU 120 starts the chance production. is finished, and the combination of decorative symbols [third layer] (in this example, "135") is fixed and stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is fixed and stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the active display 25TM003 [third layer] in the normal mode in the active display area 25TM013, and the pending display 25TM001C [third layer] in the red mode in the pending display area 25TM011. continues to be displayed. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the first pending memory number is 1, the production control CPU 120 displays "1" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second Since the number of pending memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the performance control CPU 120 finalizes and stops the combination of small symbols [first layer] (in this example, "135") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "missing (no time saving)" is determined and stopped.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority is higher in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the blackout effect at the time of winning is not executed, the covering image (first blackout image, second blackout image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is used as the background image. , Decorative pattern [third layer], Corresponding display (reserved display 25TM001C in red mode, active display 25TM003 in normal mode) [third layer], "1" in first pending memory number display area 25TM015 [first layer], Both "0" [first layer] and the small pattern [first layer] of the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 are in a visible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable display that is the subject of a preview of the flash effect at the time of winning) (as shown in FIG. 9-16) At timing T6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the winning flash performance in the white light emission mode, and causes the light emitting body 25TM100 to blink in white.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbols [third layer] in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command. let In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes an active change performance as a change performance as the first pending storage number becomes 0, and displays a red active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013. At the same time, the red pending display 25TM001C [third layer] displayed in the pending display area 25TM011 is erased. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of the small symbols [first layer] in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and displays the second pending memory number. Since the number of memories is 0, "0" [first layer] is displayed in the second pending memory number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the connection zone effect is executed. As a result, the cover image (flame effect image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding Display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [third layer], "0" in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 [first layer], "0" in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 [first layer] , and the small pattern [first layer] are both visible.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (8), at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (timing T7 shown in FIG. 9-16), the performance control CPU 120 controls the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. The decorative pattern "7" [third layer] is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5R, thereby creating a ready-to-reach state, and the characters "Reach!!" [third layer] are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the winning flash performance in the white light emission mode and turns off the light emitting body 25TM100.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the red active display 25TM003C [third layer] in the active display area 25TM013. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 continuously displays the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols [first layer] in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, a small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed, and a small pattern corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative pattern [third layer] is stopped and displayed. Also in the display area 5r, the small patterns [first layer] are continuously and variably displayed without being stopped and displayed. In addition, since the first pending memory number is 0, the production control CPU 120 continuously displays "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, Since the second pending storage number is 0, "0" [first layer] is continuously displayed in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in Figure 9-4, the display priority increases in the order of 4th layer < 3rd layer < 2nd layer < 1st layer, but in this example, the connection zone effect is executed. As a result, the cover image (flame effect image) covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed, so the normal background image 25TM200A [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], and the corresponding Display (active display 25TM003C in red mode) [third layer], "0" in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015 [first layer], "0" in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 [first layer] , and the small pattern [first layer] are both visible.

<Second embodiment>
[Start winning performance decision process]
FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19 are a second embodiment of a flowchart showing the performance determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The performance control CPU 120 performs the start winning performance determination process of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19 in the pre-read notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process shown in FIG. Execute.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1270 in the start winning performance determination process of the second embodiment are as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9. Since these steps are the same as steps S25TM1000 to S25TM1130 and steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1270 in the start winning performance determination process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. do.

After completing the process of step S25TM1130, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific flag is set (step S25TM1135). If the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. If the specific flag is not set (NO in step S25TM1135), the production control CPU 120 advances the process to step S25TM1140.

In this way, if the specific flag is not set (i.e., the winning blackout effect is not executed and it is not determined to execute the winning blackout effect), the starting winning is In the start-up winning performance determination process when this occurs, by determining NO in step S25TM1010, it is possible to perform the processes from step S25TM1020 onwards. At this time, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a blackout effect at the time of winning in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (step S25TM1050), and if it is determined to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (step S25TM1060). YES), a specific flag is set (step S25TM1080), and by determining YES in step S25TM1135, the processes from step S25TM1140 onwards are skipped. That is, each of the processing of determining whether to execute the chance effect (step S25TM1150), the process of determining whether to execute the comment preview effect (step S25TM1190), and the process of determining whether to execute the change effect (step S25TM1230). The process will be skipped. Therefore, at least during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed, the execution of the chance effect, the comment preview effect, and the change effect is restricted.

In addition, in FIG. 9-15, a new start winning occurs in a period different from the specific period (that is, a period different from both the symbol stop period and the symbol confirmation period), and the start winning effect of the first embodiment is Although examples of performances were shown when it was decided to perform various performances based on the determination process, examples of performances were shown when it was decided to execute various performances based on the start winning performance determination process in the second embodiment. The effect may also be similar to the effect example shown in FIGS. 9-15.

That is, when it is decided to execute various performances based on the start winning performance determination process of the second embodiment, the image display device 5 displays performance images similar to the performance images shown in FIGS. 9-15. It may be displayed. In this case, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the execution of predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) is restricted.

In addition, in FIG. 9-17, a new start winning occurs during a specific period (that is, either the symbol stop period or the symbol confirmation period), and various effects are determined in the start winning effect determination process of the first embodiment. 9-17 shows an example of a performance when it is decided to execute various performances based on the start winning performance determination process in the second embodiment. The effect may be similar to the example shown.

That is, when it is decided to execute various performances based on the start winning performance determination process of the second embodiment, the image display device 5 displays a performance image similar to the performance image shown in FIGS. 9-17. It may be displayed. In this case, when the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) are executed.

(Actual performance when winning a prize)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the [Description regarding the characteristic portion 25TM] of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that includes a movable body 25TM500 as an accessory near the image display device 5 (at the bottom). It is assumed that the movable body 25TM500 is movable between a tilted position (initial position) and an upright position (presentation position) according to the control of the production control board 12. When the movable body 25TM500 is in the tilted position, the movable body 25TM500 is not located in front of the image display device 5. However, in the process of moving the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the upright position, or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the upright position, at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5. do.

In this embodiment, at the timing when a starting winning occurs, a winning blackout effect and a winning winning flash effect can be executed as a special effect to notify that the jackpot expectation level is high in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and other special effects may be performed. For example, as a special performance, a winning accessory performance using the movable body 25TM500 may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-20(A), the performance control CPU 120 can execute a prize winning accessory performance based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The winning accessory effect is a golden effect image 25TM600A [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when it is decided to execute the winning accessory effect at the start of winning. This is an example of a preview performance in which a movable body movement performance is displayed and the movable body 25TM500 is moved from a tilted position to an upright position. The display color of the golden effect image 25TM600A in the prize-winning accessory presentation is golden, and the player can recognize that the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is high by executing the prize-winning accessory presentation. .

Specifically, the prize-winning performance is based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, and at the timing of the starting winning, the golden effect image 25TM600A [second By displaying the layer], it is suggested that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met) will be a jackpot. In this case, the prize-winning performance is performed as a pre-read preview performance.

In this embodiment, when the winning role effect is started based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the winning role effect is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the starting winning effect (with the target of the winning role acting). It is assumed that the display is executed continuously until the timing when a certain variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, by displaying the golden effect image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the background image [fourth layer], the decorative pattern [third layer], and The visibility of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) [third layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see (non-display state). Furthermore, when the movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the upright position or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the upright position, at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5. , visibility of the screen of the image display device 5 decreases. That is, the visibility of the effect images ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], and [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (especially the center of the effect image) (visibility of parts) decreases.

Here, due to the prize-winning performance, the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], and corresponding displays (pending display, active display) [3rd layer] will continue to be difficult to see. , as shown in FIG. 9-20(A), "2" [first layer] in the first pending storage number display area 25TM015, "0" [first layer] in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025, and The small patterns [first layer] in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r remain visible.

In this way, while the visibility of the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], and corresponding display (pending display, active display) [3rd layer] is reduced due to the prize-winning performance, The movable body 25TM500 displays the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, the second reserved memory number display area 25TM025, and the small pattern display of the image display device 5 in the process of moving from the tilted position to the standing position or in the state of being in the standing position. Since it is not located in front of areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the visibility of the retained memory number value [1st layer] and the small symbol [1st layer] decreases even during the execution period of the winning accessory effect. It remains visible without any interruptions.

In this way, the prize-winning performance is an example of a special performance performed using the image display device 5 that displays the golden effect image 25TM600A [second layer] and the movable body 25TM500 in the movable body motion performance. On the other hand, the winning flash effect is an example of a special effect performed using the light emitting body 25TM100 and the speakers 8L and 8R (device for reproducing and outputting the light emitting sound effect A or the light emitting sound effect B). In this way, the prize-winning performance as a special performance is a performance performed using two performance devices (image display device 5 and movable body 25TM500), and the prize-winning flash performance as a special performance is This is a performance executed using two performance devices (light emitter 25TM100 and speakers 8L, 8R) different from the special performance. The performance devices used for the performance are different (do not overlap) between the prize-winning performance and the prize-winning flash performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the types of special effects, and therefore it is possible to give different impressions to the player depending on the type of special effects.

Note that a part of the same production device may be used for the prize-winning performance and the prize-winning flash performance. For example, in the prize-winning performance, the movable body 25TM500, the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L and 8R (a device for reproducing and outputting sound effects when the accessory moves), whereas in the winning flash effect, a light emitting body 25TM100 and speakers 8L and 8R (devices for playing and outputting sound effects when the role objects move) are used. A device for reproducing and outputting sound B) may also be used. In this case, the winning performance as a special performance is a performance executed using three performance devices (image display device 5, movable body 25TM500, and speakers 8L, 8R), and is a performance performed as a special performance. The winning flash performance is a performance that is executed using two performance devices: a different performance device (luminous body 25TM100) from the prize-winning performance and a common performance device (speakers 8L, 8R) with the prize-winning performance. It is. In this way, it is possible to clarify the difference in the types of special effects depending on the number of effect devices used for the special effects, and to give different impressions to the player depending on the type of special effects.

(Blessing performance)
In this embodiment, when an ally character is making a final attack on an enemy character in a battle production, a predetermined timing (this is the timing at which the operation promotion display should be displayed, for example, 5 seconds before the display result is stopped and displayed) timing), an operation promotion display imitating the shape of the stick controller 31A is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a time bar for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and a "close" display. !!” is displayed.

At this time, if a battle effect with a variable pattern involving a super reach where the display result is a "jackpot" is being executed, a jackpot will occur at the timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A. A blessing function performance to bless (notify) is performed. Then, after the blessing accessory performance is performed, the ally character wins over the enemy character and the jackpot symbols are aligned. In the blessing performance, the rainbow effect image 25TM600B [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a movable body moves the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position to the standing position. By executing the motion performance, it is announced that a jackpot will occur. The display color of the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B in the blessing accessory performance is rainbow color, and the player can recognize that a jackpot will occur by executing the blessing accessory performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20(B), the background image [ 4th layer], decorative patterns [3rd layer], corresponding displays (pending display, active display) [3rd layer], and production images related to battle production [3rd layer]. (hidden state). Furthermore, when the movable body 25TM500 moves from the tilted position to the upright position or when the movable body 25TM500 is in the upright position, at least a part of the movable body 25TM500 is located in front of the image display device 5. , the visibility of the image display device 5 decreases. That is, the visibility of the effect images ([first layer], [second layer], [third layer], and [fourth layer]) displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (especially the center of the effect image) (visibility of parts) decreases.

Here, by the blessing accessory production, the background image [4th layer], the decorative pattern [3rd layer], the corresponding display (pending display, active display) [3rd layer], and the production image related to the battle production [3rd layer] layer] continues to be difficult to see, but as shown in Figure 9-20(B), "0" [first layer] in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015, the second pending memory number display area The "0" [first layer] of 25TM025 and the small symbols [first layer] of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r remain visible.

In this way, the blessing accessory performance allows the background image [4th layer], decorative pattern [3rd layer], corresponding display (pending display, active display) [3rd layer], and performance image related to battle performance [3rd layer]. 3 layer], while the movable body 25TM500 is in the process of moving from the tilted position to the standing position or in the standing position, the first reserved memory number display area 25TM015, the Since it is not located in front of the 2 pending memory number display area 25TM025 and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, even during the execution period of the blessing accessory performance, the value of the pending memory number [first layer] and the small The visibility of the pattern [first layer] remains visible without deterioration.

In this way, the winning role effect and the blessing role effect display the effect image [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, and also raise the movable body 25TM500 from the tilted position. They have a common performance mode in that they execute a movable body movement performance that moves to a certain position. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the prize-winning accessory performance, which is a common performance mode with the blessing accessory performance as the jackpot notification performance, as a pre-read preview performance.

In the prize-winning performance and the blessing performance, the effect image [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body 25TM500 is moved from the tilted position to the upright position. Although it is a common production mode in that it executes a movable body motion production, the mode of the effect image [second layer] which is a covering image that covers the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 (the effect image [second layer] ) are different.

That is, in the prize-winning performance, the golden effect image 25TM600A (display color: gold) that suggests (informs) that the expectation level of jackpot is high in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is displayed over the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. The rainbow color effect image 25TM600B (display color: rainbow color) is displayed as a cover image that covers the image, and in the blessing role performance, the rainbow color effect image 25TM600B (display color: rainbow color) suggests (notifies) that a jackpot will occur based on the variable display being executed. It is displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the device 5. In this way, there is a difference in the performance mode (display color of the effect image) between the prize-winning performance and the blessing performance. Therefore, when a movable body movement performance is performed along with a performance in which the covering image is displayed on the entire screen, the player can easily understand which performance, the winning role performance or the blessing role performance, has been executed. .

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-15, when a winning black effect is executed as a special effect, a blackout image [second layer] is used as a cover image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (red pending display 25TM001C) are displayed. ) [Third layer] and the mini characters and comment images [Third layer] have decreased visibility and become difficult to see. That is, during the period when the winning black effect is being executed, the change effect using the corresponding display (pending display, active display) [third layer], the chance effect using the decorative pattern [third layer], and The visibility of the comment preview effect using mini-characters and comment images [third layer] has decreased, making it difficult to see. In this way, when the winning black effect is executed, the change effect, chance effect, and comment preview effect can be executed, but the display of effect images related to each effect is restricted, and The effect image is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the black effect at the time of winning is not executed and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed as a special effect, a covering image (black) covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Since the out image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer])) is not displayed, the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (pending display in red color 25TM001C) are not displayed. ) [Third layer] and the mini-character and comment image [Third layer] are both visible.

In this way, when the black effect at the time of winning is not executed and the flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the change effect using the corresponding display (pending display, active display) [third layer], decorative pattern [third layer] The visibility of the chance effect using , and the comment preview effect using mini characters and comment images [3rd layer] has not decreased, and each effect can be seen. . That is, when the winning flash effect is executed when the winning blackout effect is not executed, the change effect, the chance effect, and the comment preview effect can all be executed in a visible manner, and the winning effect is black out. This means that there are no restrictions on the visibility of the effect compared to the case where the out effect is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the winning blackout effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the winning blackout effect is not executed. In addition, as shown in Figure 9-9(B), when the winning flash effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed, and the winning flash effect is higher. When the effect is executed, the winning flash effect in the red light emitting mode has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-9(C), when the chance effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the chance effect is not executed, and the chance effect is executed. In this case, the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the odd-numbered chance presentation than in the even-numbered chance presentation. In addition, as shown in Figure 9-10, when the comment preview effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the comment preview effect is not executed; In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher in the comment preview performance of the second aspect than in the comment preview performance of the first aspect. In addition, as shown in Figure 9-11, when a change effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a change effect is not executed, and the final display mode of the active display is changed to a special mode. Jackpot expectation level in the order of special mode change effect < blue mode change effect that changes the final display mode of the active display to a blue mode < red mode change effect that changes the final display mode of the active display to a red mode Is high.

Therefore, among the blackout effect when winning, flash effect when winning, chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect, the greater the number of effects that are executed in combination (the greater the number of effects that are combined), the higher the jackpot expectation. becomes higher. For example, if all of the following effects are executed: a blackout effect when winning a prize, a flash effect when winning a prize, a chance effect, a comment preview effect, and a change effect, the expectation of a jackpot will be higher than when only the comment preview effect is executed. It's getting expensive.

In addition, if the number of effects that are executed in combination among the winning blackout effect, the winning effect flash effect, the chance effect, the comment preview effect, and the change effect is the same (the number of combined effects is the same) In some cases), the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when there are more productions with a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot than when there are fewer productions with a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot. For example, if a winning blackout effect, a winning flash effect with a red light emitting mode, a chance effect in an odd number mode, a comment preview effect in the second mode, and a red mode change effect are executed, a blackout effect at the time of winning is executed. The expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when the winning flash effect in the white light emitting mode, the chance effect in the even number mode, the comment preview effect in the first mode, and the change effect in the special mode are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the start-up winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060 (YES or NO), the performance control CPU 120 performs the processing from step S25TM1090 onwards. That is, in both cases (YES or NO in step S25TM1060), whether it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning or not decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning. , the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), a process to determine whether or not to execute a comment preview effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and a process to determine whether or not to execute a change effect. Processing (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) is being performed.

According to such a configuration, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, the display mode of the display screen of the image display device 5 changes rapidly over a wide range, which can give surprise to the player. . Furthermore, when a winning flash performance is executed together with a blackout performance when winning a prize, the player can also improve interest in that the player pays attention to the degree of combination of predetermined performances (chance performance, comment preview performance, change performance). On the other hand, even when a blackout effect is executed at the time of winning a prize, processing for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect (chance effect, comment notice effect, change effect) and the effect mode is executed, so there is no need to worry about effect control. It is possible to standardize the processing (decision processing regarding whether or not to perform the performance, determination processing of the performance mode).

As shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14) at which it is decided to execute the winning blackout effect at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning blackout effect. At the timing when the effect starts and the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the variable display that is the target of the blackout effect at the time of winning) starts (timing of T7 shown in Figure 9-14), the blackout effect at the time of winning starts. At the same time as it ends, the connection zone effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-15, at the timing when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect at the time of starting winning (timing T2 shown in FIG. 9-14), the effect control CPU 120 The flash effect starts, and at a predetermined timing (in this example, the timing when a reach is achieved) in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning (the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect), the winning flash effect ends. , is performing reach direction.

According to such a configuration, the connection zone effect is executed at the timing when the blackout effect when winning a prize as a special effect ends, and the reach effect is executed at the timing when the flash effect when winning a prize as a special effect ends. The interest can be improved by drawing attention to the performance mode when the special performance ends. Furthermore, since the performance mode when the special performance ends differs depending on the type of special performance, it is possible to further diversify the performance.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the winning blackout effect is executed, a blackout image (first blackout Image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) are displayed. At this time, the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] is continuously arranged as a background image of the decorative pattern in the fourth layer.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority increases in the order of fourth layer < second layer, the blackout image (first By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the visibility of the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as a background image decreases, making it less visible. It is in a difficult state (hidden state). According to such a configuration, by executing the blackout effect at the time of winning, it is possible to give the player a special feeling and surprise of the effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), when the winning blackout effect is executed, a blackout image (first blackout Image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) are displayed.

At this time, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative pattern [third layer] is executed, and in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern [3rd layer] is changed. 3rd layer] combination (in this example, "243" and "135") is fixed and stopped. In addition, an active display (normal mode active display 25TM003 [third layer]) is continuously arranged in the active display area 25TM013, and a pending display (normal mode pending display 25TM001 [third layer]) is placed in the pending display area 25TM011. ) are continuously placed.

At this time, the value of the first pending storage number ("1" [first layer], "2" [first layer]) is displayed in the first pending memory number display area 25TM015 of the image display device 5, and the image The value of the second pending storage number (“0” [first layer]) is displayed in the second pending storage number display area 25TM025 of the display device 5. Further, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, variable display of the small pattern [first layer] is continuously executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-4, since the display priority increases in the order of third layer < second layer < first layer, the covering image covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the blackout images (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the decorative pattern [third layer] and the corresponding display (pending display) are displayed. , active display) [3rd layer] is in a difficult-to-see state (hidden state), while the value of the number of first pending memories [first layer] and the number of second pending memories are The visibility of the value [first layer] and the small design [first layer] has not deteriorated. According to such a configuration, visibility of information regarding the game can be ensured while enhancing the performance effect of the blackout performance at the time of winning.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning in the start-up winning effect determination process of the first embodiment (step S25TM1060 (YES), the performance control CPU 120 performs the processing from step S25TM1090 onwards. That is, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180). ), processing for determining whether to execute a comment preview effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and processing to determine whether to execute a change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) are performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of whether or not it has been decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, the process of determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to standardize and simplify the processing in the production control.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19, in the start winning effect determination process of the second embodiment, if it is determined to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060) ), the performance control CPU 120 sets a specific flag (step S25TM1080). If the specific flag is set (YES in step S25TM1135), the performance control CPU 120 skips the processing after step S25TM1140. That is, if it is determined to execute the blackout effect upon winning (step S25TM1060: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180); The processing for determining whether or not to perform a comment preview performance (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220) and the processing for determining whether or not to perform a change performance (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) are skipped.

According to such a configuration, when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, the visibility of the display screen of the image display device 5 decreases and becomes difficult to see, so that surprises are not given to the player. can. In addition, when a flash effect is executed when winning a prize, the player will pay attention to the degree of combination of the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) as pre-read preview effects; You can improve your interest. In addition, when the winning blackout effect is executed, processing for determining whether or not to execute certain effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) that should be restricted (process for determining whether to execute or not, effect mode) By not performing the determination process) itself, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the predetermined effect is restricted, and the processing in the effect control can be optimized.

As mentioned above, among the winning flash effect, chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect, the greater the number of effects that are executed in combination (the number of effects that are executed in combination), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. ing. In addition, as shown in Figures 9-17 (2) to (5), when the winning flash effect is being executed, other predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) as pre-read preview effects are executed. ) can be executed. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the degree of combination of predetermined effects (the number of effects executed in combination, the pattern of combinations) when the winning flash effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15 (2) to (5), during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed, the blackout image (first By displaying the blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer] and the second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer], the decorative pattern [third layer] is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ] The visibility has decreased, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 (2) to (5), even during the period when the winning flash effect is being executed, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, The decorative pattern [third layer] is in a visible state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the starting winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the starting winning occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol in the variable display being executed. If it is any timing in the fixed period (that is, if it is the timing in the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES in step S25TM1030), the performance control CPU 120 executes the blackout performance at the time of winning. The process of determining the presence or absence (processing of steps S25TM1040 to S25TM1080) is skipped. Therefore, execution of the winning blackout effect based on starting winnings that occur within a specific period is restricted, and in this embodiment, winning blackout effects that target variable displays corresponding to starting winnings that occur within a specific period are restricted. Out effects are no longer executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, in the starting winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, the timing at which the starting winning occurs is the symbol stop period or the symbol stop period in the variable display being executed. Regardless of the timing of the symbol confirmation period (that is, any timing of the specific period (see FIG. 9-8)) (YES or NO in step S25TM1030), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the flash performance at the time of winning. (processing from step S25TM1090 to step S25TM1130) is being performed. Therefore, there is no restriction on the execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winnings that occur within a specific period. It is possible to perform the performance.

According to such a configuration, the execution of the winning blackout effect is restricted during the pattern stop period in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the pattern confirmed stop period in which the decorative patterns are fixed and stopped, so that the display result of the variable display is restricted. The state in which the combination of decorative symbols suggesting (notifying) continues to be visible continues, and it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving the display result of the variable display. On the other hand, since the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not restricted during the pattern stop period in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed and the pattern fixed stop period in which the decorative patterns are fixed and stopped, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the special effect and improve interest. can.

As shown in Figure 9-9(B), when the winning flash effect is executed, there are two types of presentation modes (white emission mode and red emission mode) for the winning flash effect. The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of player. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-9(A), when a blackout effect is executed at the time of winning, there is only one type of presentation mode for the blackout effect at the time of winning, and the expectation level of the jackpot varies depending on the mode of presentation. Nothing is different. According to such a configuration, by making the presentation mode of the blackout effect at the time of winning a single one, the presentation mode of the blackout effect at the time of winning is made clear and impressive to the player, and the expectation of a jackpot of the blackout effect at the time of winning is made clear. It is also possible to clarify the degree.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (A), when the display result is "Lose (with time saving)", the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is 0%, but the display result is "Jackpot". In this case, the execution rate of the blackout effect at the time of winning is 60%. Therefore, when the display result is a "jackpot", the execution rate of the winning blackout effect is higher than when the display result is a "loss (time saving)".

In addition, as shown in Figure 9-9(B), if the display result is "lost (with time saving)", the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning is 10% (white emission mode: 10%, red emission mode: :0%), while when the display result is a "jackpot", the execution rate of the winning flash effect is 70% (white light emitting mode: 20%, red light emitting mode: 50%). Therefore, when the display result is a "jackpot", the execution rate of the winning flash effect is higher than when the display result is a "loss (time saving)".

According to such a configuration, when the display result is a "jackpot", the execution rate of the special effect is higher than when the display result is a "loss (with time saving)", and the special effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect to win the jackpot.

(Other variations)
(1) In the first embodiment described above, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the blackout image (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), various effect images of the image display device 5 (decorative design [third layer], corresponding display [third layer], mini characters and comments Although we have shown an example in which the visibility of the image [third layer] and the background image [fourth layer] is reduced to make it difficult to see, the present invention is not limited to this form, and may also be performed using other presentation devices. It may be restricted.

For example, in the comment preview performance, a mini character and a comment image are displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5, and character voice sounds corresponding to the characters shown in the comment image are played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is now possible to do so. Here, in the first embodiment described above, when the winning blackout effect is executed, and when the comment preview effect is executed, the cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5 is black. By displaying the out images (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]), the mini character and comment image [third layer] on the image display device 5 can be visually recognized. This reduces visibility and makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, since there are no restrictions on the playback output of character voice sounds, it is possible to playback and output character voice sounds ("Next, chance?", "Next, look forward to it!") in response to the execution of comment preview production. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the mini-character and the comment image [third layer], the player can recognize that the comment preview effect has been executed by the character voice sound.

Not limited to this form, if the comment preview effect is executed during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed, the visibility of the mini character and comment image [third layer] may be reduced to make them visible. In addition to creating a difficult state, the playback output of character voice sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be limited. For example, during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed, the comment preview effect is being executed in a manner that is difficult to see in the third layer, and the character voice sound corresponding to the comment preview effect is not played back and output. You can do it like this.

Also, compared to the case where the comment preview effect is executed during the period when the winning blackout effect is not executed, the case where the comment preview effect is executed during the period when the winning blackout effect is executed is better. , the volume of the character voice sound may be lowered. In other words, compared to the case where the comment preview effect is executed during the period when the winning blackout effect is not executed, it is better when the comment preview effect is executed during the period when the winning blackout effect is executed. , character voice sounds may be difficult to recognize.

(2) In the first and second embodiments described above, the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image (for example, the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9 is It may also be possible to execute a predetermined light emitting effect in which an effect image of a corresponding display color is displayed on the third layer.

For example, in the first embodiment described above, if the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during a period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be visually recognized, and the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and if the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during the period in which the winning blackout effect is being executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see, while the game effect lamp 9 may be configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. Note that, unlike this example, if the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during a period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be viewed and the game effect lamp 9 is When the predetermined light emission mode is emitted and the predetermined light emission effect is executed during the period in which the winning blackout effect is being executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer becomes difficult to see and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. Control or blinking control may not be performed (no light emitted).

In addition, in the second embodiment described above, if the predetermined light emitting effect is executed during a period in which the winning blackout effect is not executed, the predetermined effect image of the third layer can be visually recognized, and the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined light emitting manner, while during the period when the winning blackout effect is being executed, the predetermined light emitting effect is not determined to be executed based on the specific flag being set. good.

(3) In the embodiment described above, the timing at which the winning flash performance ends is when a ready-to-win state is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning flash performance may end at other timings.

For example, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous effect that makes one variable display appear to be multiple variable displays. In the case where such a configuration is adopted, in the variable display that is the subject of advance notice of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance may end at the start timing of the pseudo continuous performance. Furthermore, in the variable display that is the subject of advance notice of the winning flash performance, if the fluctuation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by a super reach, the winning flash performance may be ended at the timing when the winning flash performance develops into a super reach.

(4) In the above embodiment, there is only one type of presentation mode for the blackout effect when winning a prize, but it is not limited to this type of presentation, and multiple types of presentation modes may be provided as the presentation mode for the blackout effect when winning a prize. Good too.

For example, as the winning blackout effect, it is possible to execute a winning blackout effect in the first special mode and a winning blackout effect in the second special mode. In the winning blackout effect of the first special mode, blackout images (first blackout image 25TM300B1 [second layer], second blackout image 25TM300B2 [second layer]) are used as covering images that cover the entire display screen of the image display device 5. 2 layer]) is displayed. On the other hand, the winning blackout effect in the second special mode is a covering image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and has a higher transmittance than the blackout image used in the blackout effect in the first special mode ( For example, it is assumed that a special blackout image (with a transmittance such that the third layer and the fourth layer are slightly visible) is displayed. At this time, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is assumed to be higher when the winning blackout effect of the second special mode is executed than when the winning blackout effect of the first special mode is executed. In addition, not limited to this form, when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning in the first special mode, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the blackout effect is executed at the time of winning in the second special mode. It may be made higher.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "small win", special effects (blackout effect when winning, flash effect when winning), and predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change Although the execution rate of all of the performance (performance) is set to 0%, it is not limited to this type of format, but when the display result is a "small win", special effects (blackout performance when winning a prize, flash performance when winning a prize), The execution rate of at least one of the predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) may be set to a rate different from 0%. That is, when the display result is a "small win", at least one of the special effects (blackout effect when winning, flash effect when winning) and predetermined effects (chance effect, comment preview effect, change effect) is activated. It may be executable.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the preview effects of the chance effect, the comment preview effect, and the change effect are executed. Although we have shown an example in which the blackout effect is not determined, it is not limited to this type of format.Even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, the blackout effect among the chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect One or two types of preview effects may be executable. In other words, when it is decided to execute a blackout effect when winning a prize, fewer types of preview effects can be executed than when it is decided not to execute a blackout effect when winning a prize. good.

(7) In the second embodiment described above, when it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, any of the preview effects of the chance effect, the comment preview effect, and the change effect are executed. An example is shown in which this is not determined. Not limited to this form, if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning, it is possible to execute one or more of the following types of preview effects: chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect. , the preview effect may be executed at a lower rate than when it is decided not to execute the blackout effect when winning a prize.

(8) In the above embodiment, if a starting winning occurs during the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period), the winning blackout effect will not be executed for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. An example was given. Not limited to this form, if a starting winning occurs during a symbol stop period or a symbol confirmation period (specific period), it is possible to execute a blackout effect at the time of winning that targets the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. However, at a lower rate than when a starting winning occurs during a period different from the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period), a blackout effect is executed at the time of winning for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. You may also do so.

(9) In the above embodiment, if a starting winning occurs during the symbol stopping period or symbol confirmation period (specific period), the winning blackout effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is restricted. Although the example is not limited to this, a start winning occurs when the remaining period until the fluctuating display of decorative symbols ends is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), even if it is not within the symbol stop period. In this case, the winning blackout effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning may be limited. In addition, for a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach), it starts when the remaining period until the variation display based on the specific variation pattern ends is within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds). When a winning occurs, a winning blackout effect may be restricted for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning.

(10) In the above embodiment, only when the determination result at the time of starting winning and the display result of the variable display during execution regarding the hold memory are both "missing (no time saving)" (YES in step S25TM1020), Although we have shown examples in which it is possible to execute a blackout effect at the time of winning, a flash effect at the time of winning, a chance effect effect, and a comment notice effect, it is not limited to these forms. Even if any of the display results of the variable display is not "lost (no time saving)", one of the winning blackout effect, the winning flash effect, the chance effect, and the comment preview effect. It may be possible to perform more than one type of performance.

For example, even if either the judgment result at the time of starting a winning regarding the hold memory or the display result of the variable display during execution is "missing (with time saving)", the blackout effect at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning, the chance It may be possible to perform one or more types of effects such as an eye effect and a comment preview effect. In such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) related to the variable display where the display result is a "miss (with time saver)" is the same as the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) when the display result is a "miss" (with no time saver). This is different from the symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regarding display. Here, if a starting winning occurs during the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) related to the variable display where the display result is "miss (with time saving)", similarly to the case where it is determined as YES in step S25TM1030, The blackout effect will not be executed when winning a prize.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning blackout effect is not executed if a starting winning occurs during the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display. Regardless of the format, even if a starting win occurs during the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, blackout effect at the time of winning in some formats (some types) can be performed. . For example, even if a starting win occurs during the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the variable display (retention memory) corresponding to the starting win will be determined to be a jackpot (or super reach). In such a case, a special winning blackout performance may be executed in which a special winning sound is reproduced to notify that a jackpot has occurred (or a super reach has developed). In addition, if a starting win occurs during the symbol stop period or symbol confirmation period (specific period) in the variable display, the winning blackout effect will be executed at a lower rate than when the starting winning occurs outside the specific period. You can do it like this.

(12) In the above embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting winning slot (for example, within 0.5 seconds after the gaming ball enters the starting winning slot), a winning blackout effect or a winning flash is displayed. Although we have shown an example in which the performance is executed, it is not limited to this type of format, and for example, it can be performed at any timing within the period from the timing of the starting prize winning to the end of the variable display that is being executed at the timing of the starting winning. Then, a blackout effect corresponding to the starting prize or a flash effect corresponding to the starting winning may be executed. In addition, any event within the period from the timing of the starting prize win to the end of the variable display being executed at the timing of the starting prize winning and the start of the next variable display (including the start of the next variable display) A blackout effect corresponding to the starting prize or a flash effect corresponding to the starting winning may be executed at the same timing.

As explained above, the present characteristic portion 25TM and each modification include the following (means A1-1), (means A1-2), (means A1-3), (means A2) to (means A11). ) is disclosed.

(Means A1-1) The starting condition is satisfied (the game ball has entered the starting prize opening), and then the starting condition is satisfied (not being controlled by either the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes a variable display (fluctuating display) based on the number of pending memories (the number of pending memories is not 0) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. And,
A determining means (CPU 103 that executes the starting winning determination process (step S101)) that determines that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A special performance (blackout performance when winning a prize, flash performance when winning a prize) can be executed within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting conditions,
It is possible to perform predetermined performances (chance performance, comment preview performance, change performance) at different timings from special performances (blackout performance when winning, flash performance when winning),
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect when winning a prize has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the flash effect when winning a prize),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode (when a winning blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 decreases and becomes difficult to see). ),
The performance execution means can execute a combination of a predetermined type of special performance and a predetermined performance (as shown in FIG. 9-17, a winning flash performance, a chance performance, a comment preview performance, and a change). (can be executed in combination with at least one of the effects),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the predetermined effect is difficult to recognize (as shown in FIG. 9-15, when a blackout effect is executed as a special effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 By displaying a blackout image [second layer] as a cover image covering the entire area, chance eye effects (decorative designs [third layer]) and comment preview effects (mini characters and comment images [third layer]) , and the visibility of the effect image related to the change effect (suspended display [third layer]) decreases and becomes difficult to see),
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of combination of the performances executed by the performance execution means (combined of blackout performance at winning time, flash performance at winning time, chance eye performance, comment notice performance, and change performance) The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the number and performance mode),
Execution of a predetermined performance can be determined in both cases where a specific type of special performance is executed and when a specific type of special performance is not performed (as shown in Figures 9-6 and 9-7). As such, in the start winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, regardless of whether or not it is decided to execute the blackout performance at the time of winning (YES or NO in step S25TM1060), the performance control CPU 120: Processing for determining whether to execute a chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), processing for determining whether to execute a comment preview effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and processing for determining whether to execute a change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1230). S25TM1270))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode, which makes it possible to give a strong impression to the player while also making the player interested in the degree of complexity of the performance to be performed. On the other hand, since it is possible to determine execution of a predetermined performance regardless of whether or not a specific type of special performance is to be executed, it is possible to standardize processing in performance control.

(Means A1-2) The starting condition is satisfied (the game ball has won the prize in the starting prize opening), and then the starting condition is satisfied (not being controlled by either the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes a variable display (fluctuating display) based on the number of pending memories (the number of pending memories is not 0) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player. And,
A determining means (CPU 103 that executes the starting winning determination process (step S101)) that determines that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
A special performance (blackout performance when winning a prize, flash performance when winning a prize) can be executed within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting conditions,
It is possible to perform predetermined performances (chance performance, comment preview performance, change performance) at different timings from special performances (blackout performance when winning, flash performance when winning),
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect when winning a prize has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the flash effect when winning a prize),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode (when a winning blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the effect image on the image display device 5 decreases and becomes difficult to see). ),
The performance execution means can execute a combination of a predetermined type of special performance and a predetermined performance (as shown in FIG. 9-17, a winning flash performance, a chance performance, a comment preview performance, and a change). (can be executed in combination with at least one of the effects),
When a specific type of special performance is executed, the predetermined performance is limited (as shown in Figures 9-18 and 9-19, in the starting winning performance determination process of the second embodiment, the winning blackout performance is If it has been decided to execute (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), and the process of determining whether to execute the comment preview effect (step S25TM1185). - Step S25TM1220), the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect (Step S25TM1230 - Step S25TM1270),
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the degree of combination of the performances executed by the performance execution means (combined of blackout performance at winning time, flash performance at winning time, chance eye performance, comment notice performance, and change performance) The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the number and performance mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode on the display means becomes a specific mode, which makes it possible to give a strong impression to the player while also making the player interested in the degree of complexity of the performance to be performed. On the other hand, since the predetermined performance is limited when a specific type of special performance is executed, it is possible to optimize the processing in performance control.

(Means A1-3) The starting condition is satisfied (the game ball has entered the starting prize opening), and then the starting condition is satisfied (the game is not controlled by either the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state, A game in which a variable display of special identification information (a variable display of special symbols) is executed based on the number of pending memories (the number of pending memories is not 0), and control is possible to create an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous for the player. A machine (pachinko game machine 1),
Judgment means (running a starting winning determination process (step S101)) that determines that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening) CPU 103) and
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means;
In response to the execution of the variable display of the special identification information, the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) is executed, and the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information is displayed during a specific period (design stop period and pattern confirmation period). ) Decoration variable display means (performance control CPU 120) that can be displayed over
Equipped with
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special performance (blackout performance at winning time, flash performance at winning time) within a predetermined period (within 0.5 seconds) from the establishment of the starting condition,
There are multiple types of special effects, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of special effect (the blackout effect when winning a prize has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the flash effect when winning a prize),
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information becomes difficult to see (as shown in Figures 9-15 (2) to (5), when a blackout effect is executed as a special effect, By displaying the blackout image [second layer] as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative patterns [third layer] in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. visibility is reduced and becomes difficult to see),
When a special performance of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the decoration identification information is visible (as shown in Figure 9-17 (2) to (6), only the flash performance at the time of winning is performed as a special performance). is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is not displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are not displayed. The visibility of the [3rd layer] remains visible without deterioration),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined type of special performance while restricting execution of a specific type of special performance when the start condition is satisfied during the specific period (FIGS. 9-6 and 9). As shown in FIG. 7, in the start-up winning performance determination process of the first embodiment, in the variable display corresponding to the start-up winning that occurred during a specific period, the execution of the winning blackout effect is restricted, while the (It is possible to execute a flash effect at the time of winning even if the display fluctuates in response to the starting winnings that occur during the period.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by not reducing the visibility of the decoration identification information during a specific period, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, it is possible to secure an opportunity to perform a special effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the means A1-3 may include a part of the configuration of the gaming machine of either the means A1-1 or the means A1-2.

(Means A2) A gaming machine according to any of the means A1-1 to A1-3,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
In a variable display (fluctuating display) that is subject to a specific type of special performance (blackout performance when winning a prize), a specific type of special performance is performed in response to the execution of a related performance (connection zone performance) related to the specific type of special performance. (As shown in Figure 9-15 (6), the winning blackout effect is ended at the timing when the connection zone effect is started).
In a variable display (fluctuating display) that is a target of a predetermined type of special effect (flash effect upon winning), the predetermined type of special effect is terminated in response to execution of the predetermined effect indicating control to the advantageous state. (As shown in Figure 9-15 (8), the winning flash effect ends at the timing when the reach effect starts)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent interest from decreasing when a specific type of special performance ends, and it is also possible to prevent interest from decreasing when a predetermined type of special performance ends. .

(Means A3) A gaming machine according to any one of the means A1-1 to A1-3 and the means A2,
When a specific type of special effect is executed, the visibility of the effect background image on the display means is reduced (as shown in FIGS. 9-15 (1) and (2), when a blackout effect is executed at the time of winning) Then, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a covering image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5, so that the normal background image 25TM200A [fourth layer] as the background image of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. (The visibility decreases and visibility becomes difficult.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, a strong impression can be given to the player when a specific type of special performance is executed.

(Means A4) A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to means A1-3, means A2, and means A3,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, the display means (image display device 5 ),
The first pending information (pending display) and the second pending information (the value of the first pending memory number, the value of the second pending memory number) are displayed as pending information corresponding to the number of variable displays that have not been executed. can be displayed on the means (image display device 5),
When a specific type of special performance is executed, the visibility of the first decoration identification information and the visibility of the first reserved storage information decrease, and the visibility of the second decoration identification information and the visibility of the second reservation storage information decrease. (As shown in FIG. 9-15, when the winning blackout effect is executed, the blackout image [second layer] is displayed as a cover image covering the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5. As a result, the visibility of the decorative pattern [third layer] and the pending display [third layer] decreases, resulting in a state where it becomes difficult to see the small pattern [first layer], the value of the first pending memory number [first layer], and the visibility of the second pending memory count value [first layer] remains visible without deterioration)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, visibility of information regarding the game can be ensured while enhancing the performance effect of a specific type of special performance.

(Means A5) A gaming machine according to any of the means A1-1 to A1-3 and the means A2 to A4,
The determining means (CPU 103) is capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the establishment of a start condition regarding variable display;
The determining means (start-up winning performance determining process of the first embodiment) is
Determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice performance (chance eye performance, comment notice performance, change performance) based on the determination by the determination means (determination result at the time of starting winning),
It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined preview performance in both cases where a specific type of special performance is executed and when a specific type of special performance is not performed (see FIGS. 9-6 and 9-6). As shown in 9-7, even if it is decided to execute the blackout effect at the time of winning (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180) ), processing for determining whether to execute a comment preview effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220), and processing to determine whether to execute a change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a predetermined preview performance regardless of whether or not a specific type of special performance is executed, thereby simplifying and standardizing processing in performance control. can be achieved.

(Means A6) A gaming machine according to any of the means A-1 to 1-3 and the means A2 to A5,
The determining means (CPU 103) is capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the establishment of a start condition regarding variable display;
The determining means (start-up winning performance determining process of the second embodiment) is
Determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice performance (chance eye performance, comment notice performance, change performance) based on the determination by the determination means (determination result at the time of starting winning),
When a specific type of special performance is executed, it is not determined whether or not to execute the predetermined preview performance (as shown in Figures 9-18 and 9-19, a blackout performance is executed when winning a prize). If it has been determined (YES in step S25TM1060), the process of determining whether or not to execute the chance effect (steps S25TM1140 to S25TM1180), and the process to determine whether or not to execute the comment preview effect (steps S25TM1185 to S25TM1220) ), the process for determining whether or not to execute the change effect (steps S25TM1230 to S25TM1270) is skipped)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when a specific type of special performance is executed, it is not determined whether or not to perform a predetermined preview performance, thereby making it possible to optimize the processing in performance control.

(Means A7) A gaming machine according to any of the means A-1 to 1-3 and the means A2 to A6,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is a performance based on the determination by the determination means (judgment result at the time of starting winning), and is a predetermined performance that is different from a specific type of special performance (chance performance, comment preview performance, etc.). It is possible to perform a combination of a change performance) and a predetermined type of notice performance (flash performance when winning a prize),
The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of predetermined effects that are executed in combination with predetermined types of preview effects (for each of the winning flash effect, chance effect, comment preview effect, and change effect). The greater the number of combinations of effects, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the number of predetermined effects that are executed in combination with predetermined types of preview effects.

(Means A8) A gaming machine according to any of the means A-1 to 1-3 and the means A2 to A7,
The number of performance devices used for the special performance differs depending on the type of special performance executed by the performance execution means (the winning performance as a special performance uses two performance devices (image display device 5 and movable body 25TM500). ), while the winning flash effect as a special effect is executed using only one effect device (light emitter 25TM100)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference between the types of special effects, and it is possible to give different impressions to the player depending on the type of special effects.

(Means A9) A gaming machine according to any of the means A-1 to 1-3 and the means A2 to A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
Perform variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
When a predetermined type of special effect is executed, the decoration identification information is visible (as shown in Figure 9-17, when the winning flash effect is executed, the decorative pattern [third layer] is visible). possible),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined type of special performance while restricting the execution of a specific type of special performance during the suspension period of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7). In the start-up winning effect determination process of the first embodiment, execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted with regard to the variable display corresponding to the start-up winning that occurred in a specific period, while the execution of the blackout effect at the time of winning is restricted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to winnings, it is possible to perform a flash effect when winning a prize)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by not reducing the visibility of the decoration identification information during the suspension period of the decoration identification information, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result, and at the same time, it is possible to secure an opportunity to perform a special effect.

(Means A10) A gaming machine according to any of the means A-1 to 1-3 and the means A2 to A9,
There is only one type of special performance for a specific type (there is only one type of performance for the blackout performance when winning a prize),
There are multiple modes of the predetermined type of special effects, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined type of special effects. (The expectation of a jackpot is higher in the red light emitting mode than in the white light emitting mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to impress upon the player the mode of a specific type of special performance, and it is also possible to clarify the difference from a predetermined type of special performance, thereby making it possible to diversify the special performance.

(Means A11) A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to means 1-3 and means A2 to means A10,
Compared to the case where the display result of the variable display (fluctuating display) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) but becomes the first display result (“loss (with time saving)”) which is controlled to the time saving state, The execution rate of the special effect is higher when the second display result (“jackpot”) is controlled to be in the advantageous state (as shown in Figure 9-9(A), when the display result is “jackpot”) (The percentage of execution of blackout effects when winning is higher when the winning result is "lost (with time saving)" than when the display result is "lost (with time saving)")
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, by executing the special effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the display result will be the second display result.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display of special identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition and subsequent establishment of the starting condition, and is capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means for determining that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state based on the establishment of the starting condition;
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination by the determination means;
Decoration variable display means that can perform variable display of decoration identification information in response to execution of variable display of the special identification information, and display a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information over a specific period;
Equipped with
The decoration variable display means is capable of variably displaying the first decoration identification information and variable displaying the second decoration identification information as the variable display of the decoration identification information,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the special performance within a predetermined period from the establishment of the starting condition,
There are multiple types of special performances, and depending on the type of special performance, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the advantageous state differs.
When a specific type of special performance is executed, the visibility of the first decoration identification information decreases, but the visibility of the second decoration identification information does not decrease,
When a special performance of a predetermined type different from the specific type is executed, the first decoration identification information is easily visible;
The performance execution means is
When the starting condition is satisfied outside the specific period, a specific type of special performance and a predetermined type of special performance can be executed in parallel;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the starting condition is satisfied during the specific period, execution of a specific type of special performance is restricted while a predetermined type of special performance can be executed.

Images